Level 1
Part 1 and 2
Instructor’s Resource Manual 教师手册 for
Chinese Link 中
文
天 地
Zhōng
Wén
Tiān
Dì
Beginning Chinese Second Edition
Simplified Character Version
吴素美 Sue-mei Wu
于月明 Yueming Yu
张燕辉 Yanhui Zhang
i
田维忠 Weizhong Tian
Table of Content
目录 Table of Content
教学大纲、教学日程样本 ...................................................................................................viii 拼音练习
Pinyin Exercises ...................................................................................................................... F-1
汉字入门练习
Writing and Character Practice .............................................................................................. F-6
课堂用语练习
Classroom Expressions Practice ............................................................................................. F-7
第一课 问候
Lesson 1
Greetings............................................................................................................. 1
第二课 名字
Lesson 2
Names ................................................................................................................. 6
第三课 国籍和语言
Lesson 3
Nationalities and Languages ............................................................................... 12
第四课 学习
Lesson 4
Studies ................................................................................................................ 18
第五课 介绍
Lesson 5
Introductions ....................................................................................................... 26
第六课 家
Lesson 6
Family ................................................................................................................. 31
第七课 地址
Lesson 7
Addresses............................................................................................................ 38
第八课 见面、相约
Lesson 8
Meeting and Making Plans ................................................................................. 43
第九课 打电话
Lesson 9
Phone Calls ......................................................................................................... 50
第十课 时间表
Lesson 10
Time and Schedules ............................................................................................ 57
第十一课 点菜
Lesson 11
Ordering Food .................................................................................................... 62
第十二课 请求
Lesson 12
Making Requests ................................................................................................ 71
第十三课 衣服、逛街
Lesson 13
Clothes and Shopping ......................................................................................... 78
第十四课 生日和庆祝
Lesson 14
Birthdays and Celebrations................................................................................. 86
第十五课 地点和位置
Lesson 15
Location and Position ......................................................................................... 94
第十六课 爱好和运动
Lesson 16
Hobbies and Sports ............................................................................................. 100
第十七课 天气和四季
Lesson 17
Weather and Seasons .......................................................................................... 108
第十八课 旅行和交通
Lesson 18
Travel and Transportation .................................................................................. 114
第十九课 健康和医药
Lesson 19
Health and Medicine........................................................................................... 122
第二十课 看房和租房
Lesson 20
Renting an Apartment......................................................................................... 128
iii
Table of Content 第二十一课 未来计划
Lesson 21
Future Plans ........................................................................................................ 134
第二十二课 艺术和文化
Lesson 22
Arts and Culture ................................................................................................. 138
生词表
Vocabulary List ....................................................................................................................... 146
课文(繁体字)
Language in Use (Traditional Characters) ............................................................................. 152
iv
Instructional Sample
Chinese Link: 中文天地 Instructional Sample
Here we provide some suggestions for the instructor on how the different sections of the Chinese Link textbook may be integrated into classroom activities. These are only suggestions, and we believe that instructors will find the textbook flexible enough to be adapted to the specific needs of their programs. We generally go through the sections of each lesson in order. Following are some of the ways in which we utilize each section of the textbook: Warm-up: At the beginning of each lesson, we first attempt to raise students’ interest and motivation by providing a quick overview of its Objectives, followed by some “warm-up” exercises. The Lesson Photos with English annotations provide useful visual aids to support the warm-up activities. The instructor may ask some simple questions beginning with personal experiences and then proceeding to more social and cultural connections and comparisons. During the warm-up activities, the instructor may also introduce on the board some of the lesson’s new vocabulary and core grammar points. Vocabulary: Core vocabulary items which appear in the text of the lesson are introduced in this section along with supplementary vocabulary items. The instructor may read each one aloud, and then assign students to take turns pronouncing them and using them to make sentences. The instructor may also highlight certain vocabulary items to point out their noteworthy features, such as having different traditional and simplified forms, difficult pronunciation, close relation to the main grammar points, or different usages in Mainland China and Taiwan. The instructor may wrap up the vocabulary section by again reading aloud all the vocabulary items. Sentence Patterns: Important sentence patterns used in the main dialogue are listed in this section, and pictures are provided as visual clues to situations in which each sentence pattern is used. In class, we ask students to practice the sentence patterns in a dialogue format. This familiarizes them with the phrases before they jump into the main dialogue. It also allows the students to have a systematic and gradual transition from smaller units, such as vocabulary items, to phrases and sentences before encountering the situational dialogue. The instructor may begin by pointing out the meaning of each pattern and the main grammar points contained in it. After this, students may be assigned to work in pairs to practice playing both roles in all the patterns. The instructor will go around the room and check pronunciation. Following this exercise, the instructor may assign students to recite the patterns for further reinforcement. Finally, the patterns may be read aloud by the class together to wrap up. Language in Use: The main text of each lesson is a situational dialogue which incorporates the lesson’s core vocabulary and grammar points. It is accompanied by pictures which add context and make it more interesting. Notes provide further explanation of key points. The instructor v
Instructional Sample may ask students to read the dialogue aloud and then check their comprehension with questions. Students may also be required to think of questions about the dialogue to ask their classmates. Then the students may be asked to practice the dialogue in pairs. During this pair work, the instructor will visit each pair to check progress and help out if needed. After practicing, the pairs recite the dialogue. Some are asked to recite the dialogue as in the textbook and other groups are asked to make slight changes. After the pairs have done this, the instructor may ask students to read it aloud, or may lead a reading of the dialogue to reinforce good pronunciation and intonation, as well as practice reading skills. Activities such as re-telling and summarizing of the dialogue are also encouraged. To end this section, the instructor may highlight again the core vocabulary and main grammar points from the dialogue. Activities: The Activities section of the textbook provides exercises which are designed primarily for classroom use. At this point in the lesson we take students through the listening exercises and the character exercises. (The grammar exercises are generally used in conjunction with the Grammar section, and the communicative activities are generally used as consolidation activities.) Since these exercises are designed to be done in class, they are dynamic and interactive. Most involve interaction between instructor and students, student and student, or group and group. Clear guidelines for each activity are provided for the instructor. Our goal in providing classroom exercises is to help save instructor time, which makes the text convenient and efficient to use. The activities also serve as samples for instructors who may wish to modify them or elaborate on them in creating their own exercises for classroom use. Grammar & Grammar Exercises: Core grammar points from the main text are explained in this section. The instructor may write down the main patterns on the blackboard to facilitate the grammar instruction. Students may be asked to read aloud the English explanations and the instructor can highlight the main points, provide examples, and assign students to utilize the grammar patterns to create phrases and sentences. After this introduction we proceed to the grammar exercises in the Activities section for more practice in understanding and applying the grammar points in realistic situations. Supplementary Practice: At this point in the lesson students should be familiar with the vocabulary, grammar points and expressions covered in it. The next task is the Supplementary Practice. The supplementary texts are similar to the main texts in vocabulary, grammar, and theme. This allows students to immediately practice what they have learned from their study of the main text. Care has been taken to use a different format than the main text. For example, if the main text is in a dialogue format, the supplementary text will be in prose format and vice versa. The pedagogical purpose is to help students learn to use vocabulary and grammatical structures in varying forms of communication. We normally use this section for students to work on various reading comprehension strategies, including top-down, bottom-up, translation, interpretation, asking questions, reading aloud, re-telling, and summarizing. Communicative Activities: Communicative activities are based on situations designed to elicit the grammar points and vocabulary items that students have learned in the current and prior lessons. Students are guided to act out various scenarios. Some of the activities may also be assigned to students ahead of time so that they can prepare group performances. The instructor may also assign the Language in Use text to a group to memorize and recite. Each vi
Instructional Sample group will act out their situation and the class will be asked questions based on the performances. Students can be graded on their participation and performance. Afterwards, the instructor may highlight some common errors and review the main points. Culture Notes: The culture notes will help students to better understand Chinese societies, as well as how language reflects culture. Authentic photos are provided to create a vivid and interesting learning experience. The instructor may ask students to take turns reading each paragraph aloud or ask groups to summarize paragraphs. Then the instructor will lead a discussion of the questions listed in the culture notes. This is a time for the whole class to share personal experiences in order to better understand Chinese culture. The instructor may also assign a culture note to a student or students as a small project. The student can summarize the culture note, provide more examples, and lead the discussion in class. Fun with Chinese: This section introduces a common saying, idiom which utilizes the new vocabulary from the lesson. The instructor may ask students to read the selection aloud, then go over the questions provided for class discussion. Let’s Go: This section gives students an opportunity to interact with Chinese in an authentic context. The instructor may allow students a set time to go through the texts and the exercises by themselves as a pre-test. Then the instructor may present the useful words and expressions and content to help students develop their survival skills in the authentic Chinese context. Character Quiz: For programs which emphasize reading and writing of characters students should be asked to memorize the new characters in each lesson in order to build their literacy skills gradually. To introduce the characters the instructor may write them on the blackboard, asking students to follow along with finger writing or actually write the characters on paper. The instructor may also highlight other aspects of the character in class, such as its radical and components, or stroke order. Then students may be asked to use the Character Book to practice at home and prepare for the character quiz. For the quiz the instructor may want to dictate sentences, or write sentences in Pinyin, then ask students to write out the sentences using characters. This helps students to think of vocabulary in context and also provides revision of characters learned in previous lessons. Appendix: The Appendix may be used as a learning resource in class. The instructor may use the Appendix for review exercises in class or assign exercises based on the Appendix to students for self-study. In class, students may be asked to read aloud, review the vocabulary list, or review the traditional/simplified characters table. Students may also be asked to read aloud the Chinese transcriptions of the Language in Use section. Since there is no Pinyin in the Appendix, this allows students practice in recognizing the characters they have studied. Students can also be asked to read the text aloud in pairs. The English transcriptions of Language in Use may be used for translation or interpretation practice.
vii
秋季学期教学大纲样本
Beginning Chinese I (82-131) 初级汉语 (上)
Sample Syllabus 课程介绍
(Fall Semester) 秋季学期
Course URL: http://ml.hss.cmu.edu/courses/suemei/82-131/ I. Course Description This is a Chinese language course for beginners. Its aim is to help students to develop communicative competence in the four basic skills of listening, speaking, reading, and writing the Chinese language. Students will learn basic vocabulary and sentence structures for use in essential everyday situations through various forms of oral practice. Pinyin (the most widely used Chinese phonetic system) will be taught as a tool to learn the spoken language. Students will also learn Chinese characters in order to be able to communicate effectively in real Chinese situations. Approximately 200 words and expressions in both Pinyin and characters will be taught. While the linguistic aspects of the Chinese language are the primary focus, introduction to the social and cultural background of the language will also form an important component of the course. II. Instructors Sections A, B: Telephone: Email: Office hours:
Ms Yanhui Zhang 张燕辉 (OSC 117) 268-1894 yanhuiz@andrew.cmu.edu Wed. 11:30~12:30; or by appointment
Sections C, D: Telephone: Email: Office hours:
Ms Weizhong Tian 田维忠 (OSC 224) 268-5738 wtian@andrew.cmu.edu Wed. 1:30~2:30; or by appointment
Sections E, F:
Dr Sue-mei Wu 吴素美 (BH 245A) (82-131 coordinator) 268-5949 suemei@andrew.cmu.edu Tues. 2:30~3:30; Fri. 2:30~3:30; or by appointment
Telephone: Email: Office hours:
III. Class Schedule & Rooms Section A (Zhang) Section B (Zhang) Section C (Tian) Section D (Tian) Section E (Wu) Section F (Wu)
MTWF MTWF MTWF MTWF MTWF MTWF
9:30~10:20 10:30~11:20 11:30~12:20 12:30~1:20 1:30~2:20 2:30~3:20 viii
PHA19D PHA19D PHA19D PHA19D PHA19D PHA19D
秋季学期教学大纲样本
IV. Textbooks & Listening Materials 1. Textbook: Chinese Link:中文天地 (Beginning Chinese) (Simplified Character Version) Level 1, part 1. 2nd Edition. Publisher: Pearson 2. Student Activities Manual: Chinese Link:中文天地 (Beginning Chinese) Level 1, part 1. 2nd Edition. Publisher: Pearson 3. Character Book: Chinese Link:中文天地 (Beginning Chinese) 2nd Edition. Publisher: Pearson 4. Audio CDs to Accompany Text and Student Activities Manual Level 1, part 1. 2nd Edition. Publisher: Pearson Textbook, Student Activities Manual, Character Book, and audio CDs are available at the CMU bookstore located in the basement of the University Center. V. Requirements Listening materials: It is very hard to learn to speak a foreign language without adequate contact with the language. One hour of class a day is not enough. Students are therefore required to make full use of the listening materials provided after class. Part of the homework for each lesson will be done with the help of these. Students are strongly advised to practice with the listening materials as much as possible in order to lay a good foundation for further training in spoken Chinese. Don’t just listen, but also repeat after the listening materials, imitating the voices of the native speakers. Class attendance and participation are VERY IMPORTANT for this course. Students are required to attend ALL scheduled classes and take an active part in classroom activities. Attendance will be recorded every day. If, for some justifiable reason, you are not able to come to class on a certain day, you must advise the instructor in advance, unless it’s an emergency. Supporting documents (e.g., doctor’s note) should be submitted in order for an absence to be excused. Class participation accounts for 8% of your total grade. If your absences from the class exceed 10 class hours, you will get a zero for attendance and participation. Moreover, for each unexcused absence, 0.5 points will be deducted from your final grade. Character quizzes (CQ): In order to build a good foundation of Chinese reading and writing skills, regular character practice is essential. Character quizzes will be held regularly. They will account for 10% of your total grade. Missed character quizzes cannot be made up. To allow for excused absences, emergencies, and “bad days”, your three lowest scores on character quizzes for the semester will not be included in your average. Homework: Homework will be assigned regularly. (Please refer to the daily schedule for the due dates). Late submission will result in a deduction of points from your grade. Five points out of 100 will be deducted for each day the homework is late. Homework received more than one week after the due date will receive no credit. If you forget to bring your homework to class, you may leave it
ix
秋季学期教学大纲样本
in the folder outside the instructor’s office or in her mailbox at the mail office of the department (BH 160). Tests: There will be 6 lesson tests during the semester (Please refer to the daily schedule for the dates). They will account for 30% of your total grade. Make-up tests will not be permitted except in the case of illness or emergency. Written proof needs to be presented to the instructor for rescheduling. Final exam: The final exam will be held on 12/8 Wed. & 12/10 Fri.). This will cover everything studied during the semester. The guidelines will be provided during the semester. Since your attendance will be recorded every day, you are required to stay in the section for which you have registered in order for the instructor to keep an accurate record of your performance. The classroom will be highly student-centered. What this means is that the instructor will be doing very little in the way of explaining or lecturing. Rather, classroom learning will be achieved mainly through group/pair work, role-playing, and other activities geared toward your active production of the Chinese language so it is very important to study the material for a given day before coming to class. VI. Grades Calculation A = 90 & 90 above B = 82 & 82 above C = 70~82 D = 60~69 R = Below 60
Distribution Class attendance and participation Character quizzes 13 Homework (3%13) Six Lesson tests (Pinyin+Class Exp., L1+L2, L3+L4, L5+L6, L7+L8, L9+L10 (5%6 ) Two interviews with instructor (3%2) Final exam (group performance) Have fun and good luck with your new school year!!
x
Total 100% 8% 10% 39% 30% 6% 7%
秋季学期教学日程样本
82-131 Beginning Chinese I 初级汉语 (上) Sample Daily Schedule (Fall Semester) (Assuming a 15-week semester with four 50-minute class meetings per week)
The first semester of a two-semester sequence cover the Foundation section and Lessons 1 through 10, along with review sections and lesson tests. Lessons 11 through 22, along with review sections and lesson tests, will be covered in the second semester. HW: Homework Monday Week1 8/30 - Class begins (course intro. Syllabus....) - Map of China - Intro. to Chinese - Classroom Expressions (1) 1-14 - Classroom Expressions Practice (up to item 14)
Week 2 9/6 ☺☺☺☺ Labor Day CMU No Classes 劳工节，不上课 Week 3 9/13 - Lesson 1 - L1 CQ: 你好是学生 吗 Assign 4: L1 HW
Assign: Assignment Tuesday 8/31 - Classroom Expressions (2) 15-42 - Classroom Expressions Practice - Pinyin (1) a o e i u ü; b p m f; d t n l; Exe (1) - Pinyin (2): g k h; j q x; z c s; zh ch sh r; Exe (2) Assign 1: Pinyin HW I & II 9/7 - Pinyin Review - Test (1): Pinyin & Class Exp. Due: Pinyin HW V & VI 9/14 - Lesson 1 - L1 CQ: 我呢也他不 老师 - Writing Chinese characters - L1: Let’s go
xi
Exe: Exercise
CQ: Character quiz
Wednesday 9/1 - Review Class Exp. - Pinyin (3): ai ei ao ou; ia iao ie iu; ua uo uai ui üe; Exe (3) - Pinyin (4): an en ian in uan un; ang eng ong iang ing iong uang; Exe (4) Assign 2: Pinyin HW III & IV
Friday 9/3 - Pinyin (5): Special Pinyin and tonal rules; Exe (5) - Pinyin (6): Pinyin Review; Exe (6) Due: Pinyin HW I II, III, IV Assign 3: Pinyin HW V & VI
9/8 - Intro. Lesson 1 characters 你好是学 生吗
9/10 Review: Pinyin & Class Expression, Introduce Lesson 1 characters 你好是学生吗
9/15 - Lesson 2 - Intro. L2 characters
9/17 - Lesson 2 - L2 CQ: 您贵姓请问 的 Due: L1 HW
秋季学期教学日程样本 Monday Week 4 9/20 - Lesson 2 - L2 CQ: 英文名字中 叫 Assign 5: L2 HW Week 5 9/27 Test (2): L1+L2
Week 6 10/4 - Lesson 4 - L4 CQ: 那书这本工 程难 Due: L3 HW
Tuesday 9/21 - Lesson 2 - L2 CQ: 什么她谁同 - L2: Let’s go 9/28 ☺☺☺☺☺☺ Mid-autumn festival celebration 庆祝 [qìngzhù] (to celebrate) 中秋节 [Zhōngqiū jié] (Mid-autumn festival) - Lesson 3 10/5 - Lesson 4 - L4 CQ: 太可功课多 们少
Week 7 10/11 Test (3): L3+L4 Due: L4 HW
10/12 - Lesson 5 - L5 CQ: 朋友来介绍 下室
Week 8 10/18 - Lesson 6 - L6 CQ: 家大从在四 爸妈姐 Due: L5 HW
10/19 - interview w/instructor; (up to L6); feedback 与老师面谈
Week 9 10/25 - Lesson 6 - L6 CQ: 作男没辆车 只狗爱 - L6: Let’s go Due: L6 HW
10/26 Test (4): L5+L6
Wednesday 9/22 - Lesson 3 - L3 CQ: 哪国人很对 了 Due: L2 HW 9/29 - Lesson 3 - L3 CQ: 法美说会一 点儿和 Assign 6: L3 HW
Friday 9/24 Review: Lessons 1-2
10/6 - Lesson 4 - L4 Character Rev. - L4: Let’s go Assign 7: L4 HW 10/13 - Lesson 5 - L5 CQ: 有几两个都 常跟 Assign 8: L5 HW
10/8 Review: Lessons 3-4
10/20 - interview w/instructor; (up to L6); feedback 与老师面谈 Assign 9: L6 HW 10/27 - Lesson 7 - L7 CQ: 住宿舍号房 间电话小码 Assign 10: L7 HW
xii
10/1 - Lesson 3 - L3 Character Rev. - L3: Let’s go
10/15 - Lesson 5 - L5 Character Rev. - L5: Let’s go - Chinese song 中国歌 10/22 ☺☺☺☺☺☺ Mid-semester Break CMU No Classes 期中休息，不上课 10/29 Review: Lessons 5, 6 and 7
秋季学期教学日程样本 Monday Week 10 11/1 - Lesson 7 - L7 CQ: 二三五六七 八九手机校外 Due: L7 HW Week 11 11/8 - Lesson 8 - L8 Character Rev. - Review L7-L8 - L8: Let’s go Due: L8 HW Week 12 11/15 - Lesson 9 - L9 CQ: 打喂等知道 谢吧忙正看视做
Tuesday 11/2 - Lesson 7 - Review: - L7: Let’s go - Intro. Lesson 8 11/9 Test (5): L7+L8 - pass out group final project guidelines
Wednesday 11/3 - Lesson 8 - L8 CQ: 认识去上以 后事想回起 Assign 11: L8 HW
Friday 11/5 - Lesson 8 - L8 CQ: 吃饭菜今天 次怎样行再见
11/10 - 中国电影 - work on group project
11/12 - 中国电影 - work on group project
11/16 - Lesson 9 - L9 CQ: 网就位留言 时候晚要给
11/19 Review: Lessons 8-9
12/10 Final Oral Performance Exam 期末口试表演
Week 13 11/22 - interview w/instructor; feedback 与老师面谈 Due: L9 HW
11/23 - interview w/instructor; feedback 与老师面谈 Due: L9 HW
Week 14 11/29 - Lesson 10 - L10 CQ: 活期门每 床睡觉半才刻 Assign 13: L10HW Week 15 12/6 - Review: Lessons 1-10 - Group final project rehearsal
11/30 - Lesson 10 - L10 CQ: 分然图馆 午喜欢球写信
11/17 - Lesson 9 - L9 Character Rev. - L9: Let’s go Assign 12: L9 HW 11/24 ☺☺☺☺☺☺ Thanksgiving Holidays No Classes 感恩节 [Gǎn’ēnjié], 不上课 12/1 - Lesson 10 - L10 CQ: 子邮件地 址祝年月日
12/7 - Comprehensive Review - Group final project rehearsal
12/8 Test (6): L9+L10 (and up to L10) Final written exam 期末笔试
xiii
11/26 ☺☺☺☺☺☺ Thanksgiving Holidays No Classes 感恩节，不上课 12/3 - Lesson 10 - L10: Let’s go Due: L10 HW
春季学期教学大纲样本 Beginning Chinese II (82-132) 初级汉语 (下)
Sample Syllabus 课程介绍
(Spring Semester) 春季学期
Course URL: http://ml.hss.cmu.edu/courses/suemei/82-132/ I. Course Description This course is the continuation of the beginning Chinese course for beginning students of Mandarin Chinese. Students will continue learning the basic skills of listening to, speaking, reading, and writing of Chinese for everyday communication. Building upon the vocabulary and sentence structures taught in the first semester, students will learn more useful expressions and the advanced sentence structures necessary for use in day-to-day life. More class time will be devoted to conversations related to everyday situations. While emphasis will be laid on the communicative skills of listening and speaking, students will continue to learn to read and write Chinese characters, and write short essays in Chinese. To facilitate the study of the language, different aspects of Chinese culture and society will be introduced through audiovisual materials and group activities. II. Instructors Sections A, B (9:30, 10:30): Telephone: E-mail: Office hours:
Ms. Weizhong Tian 田维忠 (OSC 224) 268-5738 wtian@andrew.cmu.edu Tues. 10:30~11:20; or by appointment
Sections C, D (11:30, 12:30): Telephone: E-mail: Office hours:
Dr. Sue-mei Wu 吴素美 (BH 245A) (82-132 coordinator) 268-5949 suemei@andrew.cmu.edu Tues. 3:30~4:20; Fri. 3:30~4:20; or by appointment
Sections E, F (1:30, 2:30): Telephone: E-mail: Office hours:
Ms. Yanhui Zhang 张燕辉 (OSC 117) 268-1894 yanhuiz@andrew.cmu.edu Tues. 3:30~4:20; or by appointment
III. Class Schedule & Rooms Section A (Tian) Section B (Tian) Section C (Wu) Section D (Wu) Section E (Zhang) Section F (Zhang)
MTWF MTWF MTWF MTWF MTWF MTWF
9:30~10:20 10:30~11:20 11:30~12:20 12:30~1:20 1:30~2:20 2:30~3:20
xiv
PHA19D PHA19D PHA19D PHA19D PHA19D PHA19D
春季学期教学大纲样本
IV. Textbooks & Listening Materials 1. Textbook: Chinese Link:中文天地 (Beginning Chinese) (Simplified Character Version) Level 1, part 2. 2nd Edition. Publisher: Pearson 2. Student Activities Manual: Chinese Link:中文天地 (Beginning Chinese) Level 1, part 2. 2nd Edition. Publisher: Pearson 3. Character Book: Chinese Link:中文天地 (Beginning Chinese) 2nd Edition. Publisher: Pearson 4. Audio CDs to Accompany Text and Student Activities Manual Level 1, part 2. 2nd Edition. Publisher: Pearson Textbook, Student Activities Manual, Character Book, and audio CDs are available at the CMU bookstore located in the basement of the University Center. V. Requirements Listening materials: It is very hard to learn to speak a foreign language without adequate contact with the language. One hour of class a day is not enough. Therefore, students are required to make full use of the listening materials for practice outside of class time. Part of the homework for each lesson will be done with the help of these. Students are strongly advised to practice with the listening materials as much as possible to lay a good foundation for further training in spoken Chinese. Don’t just listen, but also repeat after the listening materials, imitating the voices of the native speakers. Class attendance and participation are VERY IMPORTANT for this course. Students are required to attend ALL scheduled classes and take an active part in classroom activities. Attendance will be recorded every day. If, for some justifiable reason, you are not able to come to class on a certain day, you must advise the instructor in advance, unless it’s an emergency. Supporting documents (e.g., doctor’s note) should be submitted in order for an absence to be excused. Class participation accounts for 10% of your total grade. If your absences from the class exceed 10 class hours, you will get a zero for attendance and participation. Moreover, for each unexcused absence, 0.5 points will be deducted from your final grade. Homework will be assigned regularly. (Please refer to the daily schedule for the due dates). Late submission will result in a deduction of points from your grade. Five points out of 100 will be deducted for each day the homework is late. Homework received more than one week after the due date will receive no credit. If you forget to bring your homework to class, you may leave it in the folder outside the instructor’s office or in her mailbox at the main office of the department (BH 160). Character quizzes: In order to build a good foundation of Chinese writing and reading skills, practicing and reciting Chinese characters regularly are essential. Character quizzes will be held regularly. They will account for 10% of your total grade. Missed character quizzes cannot be made up. To allow for excused absences, emergencies, and “bad days”, your three lowest scores on character quizzes for the semester will not be included in your average.
xv
春季学期教学大纲样本 In-class oral exercises: In order to help improve your everyday communication in Chinese, there will be 5 in-class group oral exercises during the semester (Please refer to the daily schedule for the dates). They will account for 10% of your total grade. Tests: There will be 6 lesson tests during the semester (please refer to the daily schedule for the dates). They will account for 30% of your total grade. Make-up tests will not be permitted except in the case of illness or emergency. Written proof needs to be presented to the instructor for rescheduling. The final exam will be a group oral performance (10% of course grade; on 4/28 & 4/30). It will cover everything studied during the semester. The guidelines will be provided during the semester. Research project: A research project on Chinese culture forms part of the requirements of the course. It will account for 6% of your total grade. The guidelines will be provided during the semester. Since your attendance and participation will be recorded every day, you are required to stay in the section for which you have registered in order for the instructor to keep an accurate record of your performance. The classroom will be highly student-centered. What this means is that the instructor will be doing very little in the way of explaining or lecturing. Rather, classroom learning will be achieved mainly through group/pair work, role-playing, and other activities geared toward your active production of the Chinese language. So, it is very important to study the material for a given day before coming to class. VI. Grades Calculation A = 90 above B = 83 above C = 70–82 D = 60–69 R = Below 60
Distribution Class attendance and participation Character quizzes 5 In-class oral exercises (52%) 12 Homeworks (122%) 6 Lesson tests (65%) Research project Final oral exam
xvi
Total 100% 10% 10% 10% 24% 30% 6% 10%
春季学期教学日程样本
82-132 Beginning Chinese II 初级汉语 (下) Sample Daily Schedule (Spring Semester) (Assuming a 15-week semester with four 50-minute class meetings per week)
The first semester of a two-semester sequence will cover the Foundation section and Lessons 1 through 10, along with review sections and lesson tests. Lessons 11 through 22, along with review sections and lesson tests, will be covered in the second semester. HW: Homework Oral Exe: In-class-oral exercise Monday Week1 1/12 - Class begins (course intro. Syllabus, Daily schedule, etc.) - Review (82-131, L1-L4) Week 2 1/19 Martin Luther King Day, No Classes 不上课
Tuesday 1/13 - Review (82-131, L5-L10) - Characters, texts & grammar points - Intro. Lesson 11 1/20 - Lesson 11 - L11 CQ: 盘炒十碗 汤双筷 - L11: Let’s go
Week 3 1/26 - Lesson 12 - L12 CQ: 借明用得 场接妹飞玩 Due: L11 HW
1/27 - Lesson 12 - L12 CQ: 到排挡开 应该题白色
Week 4 2/2 - Lesson test #1: L11-L12 Due: L12 HW
2/3 - Lesson 13 - L13 CQ: 买衬衫店 条裙或者裤黄
Week 5 2/9 - Lesson 14 - L14 CQ: 岁空星过 为舞参加 Due: L13 HW
2/10 - Lesson 14 - L14 CQ: 定蛋糕送 棒客气
Assign: Assignment CQ: Character quiz Wednesday 1/14 - Lesson 11 - L11 CQ: 红茶还绿 服务员坐
Friday 1/16 - Lesson 11 - L11 CQ: 先喝杯冰 水瓶乐面饺
1/21 - Lesson 11 - Start Lesson 12 - Oral Exe #1: in group, perform L11 or L12 text from memory Assign #1: L11 HW 1/28 - Lesson 12 - L12 CQ: 停习练能 进步 - L12: Let’s go Assign #2: L12 HW 2/4 - Lesson 13 - L13 CQ: 错比较穿 黑试帮让 Assign #3: L13 HW 2/11 - Lesson 14 Assign #4: L14 HW - L14: Let’s go
1/23 Chinese New Year Celebration 中国新年庆祝
xvii
1/30 Review: Lessons 11-12
2/6 - Lesson 13 - L13 CQ: 钱块张影 票 - L13: Let’s go 2/13 Review: Lessons 13-14
春季学期教学日程样本 Monday Week 6 2/16 - Lesson test #2: L13-L14 Due: L14 HW
Tuesday 2/17 - Lesson 15 - L15 CQ: 前边迎观 里厨公旁走
Wednesday 2/18 - Lesson 15 - L15 CQ: 厅面餐洗 澡卧桌园真 Assign #5: L15 HW
Week 7 2/23 - Lesson 16 - L16 CQ: 篮俩教游 泳非快体育池 Due: L15 HW
2/24 - Lesson 16 - L16 CQ: 健身锻炼 现昨赛业包慢 - 唱中国歌 (song)
Week 8 3/1 - Lesson test #3: L15-L16
3/2 - interview w/instructor (up to L17); Mid-semester feedback 与老师面谈
Week 9 3/8 ☺☺☺☺☺☺☺☺ Spring Break No Classes 春假，不上课 ☺☺☺☺☺☺☺☺ Week 10 3/15 - Lesson 17 - L17 CQ: 春久放假 夏秋冬其最暖短热
3/9 ☺☺☺☺☺☺☺☺ Spring Break No Classes 春假，不上课 ☺☺☺☺☺☺☺☺ 3/16 - Lesson 17 - L17 CQ: 华氏百度 极刮风雨冷雪 - Oral Exe #3: in group, perform L16 or L17 text from memory - L17: Let’s go Due: L17 HW
2/25 - Lesson 16 Assign #6: L16 HW - L16: Let’s go - start Lesson 17 3/3 - interview w/instructor (up to L17); Mid-semester feedback 与老师面谈 Assign #7: L17 HW 3/10 ☺☺☺☺☺☺☺☺ Spring Break No Classes 春假，不上课 ☺☺☺☺☺☺☺☺ 3/17 - Lesson L18 - L18 CQ: 火旅离远 只钟骑自共汽
xviii
Friday 2/20 - Lesson 15 - Oral Exe #2: in group, perform L13, L14 or L15 text from memory - L15: Let’s go 2/27 Review: Lessons 15-16
3/5 ☺☺☺☺☺☺☺☺ - Mid-semester Break CMU No Classes 期中休息，不上课 ☺☺☺☺☺☺☺☺ 3/12 ☺☺☺☺☺☺☺☺ Spring Break No Classes 春假，不上课 ☺☺☺☺☺☺☺☺ 3/19 Lesson L18 - L18 CQ: 路近西部 景船南听海租 - pass out research project guidelines
春季学期教学日程样本 Monday Week 11 3/22 Review: Lessons 17-18 - L18: Let’s go
Tuesday 3/23 Lesson test #4: L17-L18 Due: L18 HW
Wednesday 3/24 - Lesson 19 - 中国电影 - work on research project
Week 12 3/29 - Lesson 19 - L19 CQ: 感冒饿像 舒头疼发烧咳嗽病 - Lesson 19 - pass out group final oral performance guidelines
3/30 Lesson 19 - L19 CQ: 考复所医 药休息准备笔记 - Oral Exe #4: in group, perform L18 or L19 text from memory Due: L19 HW 4/6 - Lesson 20 - L20: Let’s go
3/31 - Lesson 19 - L19: Let’s go
Week 14 4/12 Lesson test #5: L19-L20 Due: L20 HW
4/13 Lesson 21 - L21 CQ: 暑毕决申 研究院找司
Week 15 4/19 - Lesson 21 - Start L22 - L22 CQ: 因已经丽 城市处新些方动如 Due: L21 HW
4/20 - interview w/instructor; feedback 与老师面 谈 (up to L22) - work on group final project
4/14 Lesson 21 - L21 CQ: 实脑班意 思愉平安运 - Oral Exe #5: in group, perform L20 or L21 text from memory Assign #11: L21 HW 4/21 - interview w/instructor; feedback 与老师面 谈 (up to L22) - work on group final project Assign #12: L22 HW
Week 13 4/5 - Lesson 20 - L20 CQ: 但女必须 第付楼马
4/7 Review: Lessons 19-20
xix
Friday 3/26 Lesson 19 - 中国电影 - work on research project Assign #9: L19 4/2 - Lesson 20 - L20 CQ: 把带啊搬 出关系
4/9 - oral presentation of the research project 文化项目报告 (second group) - Research project essay Due 4/16 - Lesson 21 - L20: Let’s go
4/23 Lesson 22 - L22 CQ: 京剧东笼 尝始高兴收心板保 重
春季学期教学日程样本 Monday Week 16 4/26 - Lesson 22 - L20: Let’s go - work on final oral project - Review: Lessons 21-22
Tuesday 4/27 - Comprehensive Review: Lessons 11-22
Wednesday 4/28 Lesson Test #6: up to L22 Due: L22 HW
xx
Friday 4/30 Final Oral Performance Exam 期末口试表演
秋季学期教学日程样本(二) Sample Daily Schedule (Fall Semester) (Assuming a 16-week semester with two 100-minutes class meetings per week) The first semester of a two-semester sequence will cover Foundation section and Lessons 1 through 10, along with review sections and lesson tests. Lessons 11 through 22, along with review sections and lesson tests, will be covered in the second semester. HW: Homework
Assign: Assignment
Tuesday Week 1 8/31 - Course info. Syllabus - Introduce to Chinese - Map of China - Classroom Expressions
Week 2 9/7 - Pinyin 4: an en ian in uan un ang eng ong iang ing iong uang Exe 4 - Pinyin 5: Special Pinyin and tonal rules Exe 5 - Pinyin 6. Pinyin Review Exe 6 Due: Pinyin HW 1, 2 Assign 2: Pinyin HW 3, 4 Week 3 9/14 Lesson 1 - L1 CQ: 你好是学生吗 - Writing Chinese characters
Week 4 9/21 Lesson 2 - L2 CQ: 您贵姓请问的 Due: L1 HW Week 5 9/28 Mid-Autumn Festival 中秋节 Review: Lessons 1-2 Test 2: L1 & L2 Lesson 3 character intro. Due: L2 HW
CQ: Character quiz
Thursday 9/2 - Classroom expressions - Pinyin 1: a o e i u ü, b p m f, d t n l Exe.1 - Pinyin 2: g k h j q x z c s zh ch sh r Exe. 2 - Pinyin 3: ai ei ao ou, ia iao ie iu, ua uo uai ui üe Exe 3 Assign 1: Pinyin HW 1 &2 9/9 Review: Pinyin and Classroom & Expressions Test 1: Pinyin & Class Exp. - Intro. L1 Study characters 你好是学生吗 Assign 3: Pinyin HW 5 , 6 Due: Assign 2: Pinyin 3, 4 9/16 Lesson 1 L1 CQ: 我呢也他不老师 - L1: Let’s go - Intro. L2 Characters Assign 4: L1 HW 9/23 Lesson 2 - L2 CQ: 英文名字中叫什么她谁同 - L2: Let’s go Assign 5: L2 HW 9/30 Lesson 3 CQ: 哪国人很对了法美说会一点儿和 - L3: Let’s go Assign 6: L3 HW
xxi
秋季学期教学日程样本(二) Tuesday Week 6 10/5 Lesson 4 CQ: 那书这本工程难 Due: L3 HW
Week 7 10/12 Test 3: L3 & L4 Introduce Lesson 5 Due: L4 HW Week 8 10/19 Lesson 5 CQ: 有几两个都常跟 L5: Let’s go - Chinese song 中国歌 Week 9 10/26 Lesson 6 CQ: 作男没辆车只狗爱 Review: Lessons 5-6 L6: Let’s go Assign 9: L6 HW Week 10 11/2 Lesson 7 CQ: 住宿舍号房间电话小码 Week 11 11/9 看中国电影 Chinese movie
Week 12 11/16 Lesson 8 CQ: 吃饭菜今天次怎样行再见 L8: Let’s go Assign 11: L8 HW
Thursday 10/7 Lesson 4 CQ: 太可功课多们少 - L4: Let’s go Review: Lessons 3-4 Assign 7: L4 HW 10/14 Lesson 5 CQ: 朋友来介绍下室 Assign 8: L5 HW 10/21 Lesson 6 CQ: 家大从在四爸妈姐 Interview with instructor (up to L6); feedback 与老师面谈 Due: L5 HW 10/28 Test 4: L5 & 6 Introduce Lesson 7 Due: L6 HW
11/4 Lesson 7: 二三五六七八九手机校外 Assign 10: L7 HW L7: Let’s go 11/11 看中国电影 Chinese movie Lesson 8 CQ: 认识去上以后事想回起 Pass out group final project guidelines Due: L7 HW 11/18 Lesson 8 Review: Lessons 7-8
xxii
秋季学期教学日程样本(二) Tuesday Week 13 11/22 Test 5: L7 &L8 Due: L8 HW Week 14 11/30 Lesson 9 CQ: 打喂等知道谢吧忙正看视做
Week 15 12/7 Lesson 10 CQ: 活期门每床睡觉半才刻分然图馆午 Assign 13: L10 HW Due: L9 HW Week 16 12/14 Review: Lessons 1-10 Comprehensive Review Group final project Due: L10 HW
Thursday 11/25 Thanksgiving Holidays, no class 12/2 Lesson 9 CQ: 网就位留言时候晚要给 L9: Let’s go Review: Lessons 8-9 Assign 12: L9 HW 12/9 Lesson 10 CQ: 喜欢球写信子邮件地址祝年月日 L10: Let’s go 12/16 Test 6: L9 & L10 (and up to L10) 期末笔试 & Final Oral Performance Exam 期末口试表演
xxiii
春季学期教学日程样本(二)
Beginning Chinese II 初级汉语 (下) Sample Daily Schedule (Spring Semester) (Assuming a 15-week semester with two 100-minute class meetings per week)
The first semester of a two-semester sequence will cover the Foundation section and Lessons 1 through 10, along with review sections and lesson tests. Lessons 11 through 22, along with review sections and lesson tests, will be covered in the second semester.
Daily Schedule (Spring Semester) HW: Homework Oral Exe: In-class oral exercises Tuesday Week1 1/13 - Class begins (Course intro. Syllabus, Daily schedule....etc.) - Review (L1-L7) Week 2 1/20 - Lesson 11 - L11 CQ: 先喝杯冰水瓶乐面饺 - L11: Let’s go
Week 3 1/27 - Lesson 12 - L12 CQ: 借明用得场接妹飞玩到排挡 Due: L11 HW
Week 4 2/3 Review: Lessons 11-12 - Lesson test #1: L11-L12 Intro. To L13 Due: L12 HW
Assign: Assignment CQ: Character quiz Thursday 1/15 Review: Lessons 8-10 - Lesson 11 - L1 CQ: 红茶还绿服务员坐 1/22 - Lesson 11 L1 CQ: 盘炒十碗汤双筷 Chinese New Year Celebration The year of the Monkey 中国新年庆祝 ☺☺☺☺☺☺☺☺ Assign #1: L11 HW 1/29 - Lesson 12 L12 CQ: 开应该题白色停习练能进步 - L12: Let’s go - Oral Exe: in group, perform L11 or L12 text from memory Assign #2: L12 HW 2/5 - Lesson 13 - L13 CQ: 买衬衫店条裙或者裤黄
xxiv
春季学期教学日程样本(二) Tuesday Week 5 2/10 - Lesson 13 - L13 CQ: 错比较穿黑试帮让钱块张影票 - L13: Let’s go Assign #3: L13 HW Week 6 2/17 - Lesson 14 - L14CQ: 定蛋糕送棒客气 - L14: Let’s go Due: L13 HW Assign #4: L14 HW Week 7 2/24 ☺☺☺☺☺☺☺☺ - Spring Break No Class 期中休息，不上课 ☺☺☺☺☺☺☺☺ Week 8 3/2 - Lesson 15 - L15 CQ: 前边迎观里厨公旁走 Due: L14 HW
Week 9 3/9 Lesson 16 - L16 CQ: 篮俩教游泳非快体育池 Due: L15 HW Assign #6: L16 HW Week 10 3/16 Review: Lessons 15-16 Lesson test #3: L15-L16 Due: L16 HW Week 11 3/23 Lesson 17 - L17 CQ: 华氏百度极刮风雨冷雪 - Oral Exe: in group, perform L16 or L17 text from memory - L17: Let’s go Assign #7: L17 HW
Thursday 2/12 - Lesson 14 - L14 CQ: 岁空星过为舞参加
2/19 Review: Lessons 13-14 - Lesson test #2: L13-L14 - Interview w/instructor (up to L14) Mid-semester feedback 与老师面谈 2/26 ☺☺☺☺☺☺☺☺ - Spring Break No Class 期中休息，不上课 ☺☺☺☺☺☺☺☺ 3/4 - Lesson 15 - L15 CQ: 厅面餐洗澡卧桌园真 - L15: Let’s go - Oral Exe: in group, perform L13, l14 or L15 text from memory Assign #5: L15 HW 3/11 - Lesson 16 - L16 CQ: 健身锻炼现昨赛业包慢 - 唱中国歌 (song) - L16: Let’s go 3/18 Lesson 17 - L17 CQ: 春久放假夏秋冬其最暖短热 3/25 Lesson L18 - L18 CQ: 火旅离远只钟骑自共汽 Due: L17 HW
xxv
春季学期教学日程样本(二) Tuesday Week 12 3/30 Lesson L18 - L18 CQ: 路近西部景船南听海租 - L18: Let’s go Assign #8: L17 HW - Work on research project Week 13 4/6 Lesson 19 L19 CQ: 感冒饿像舒头疼发烧咳嗽病 - L19: Let’s go - Oral Exe: in group, perform L18 or L19 text from memory Assign #9: L19 Week 14 4/13 Lesson 20 - L20 CQ: 把带啊搬出关系 Work on group final project Assign #10: L20 Week 15 4/20 Review: Lessons 19-20 Lesson test #5: L19-L20 Introduction to Lesson 21 L21 CQ: 暑毕决申研究院找 Due: L20 HW Work on group final project Week 16 4/27 Lesson 22 L22 CQ: 京剧东笼尝始高兴收心板保重 - L22: Let’s go Review: Lessons 21-22
Thursday 4/1 Review: Lessons 17-18 Lesson test #4: L17-L18 Introduction to Lesson 19 Due: L18 HW - Work on research project 4/15 Lesson 19 L19 CQ: 考复所医药休息准备笔记 Oral presentation of the research project 文化项 目报告 Pass out group final oral performance guidelines Due: L19 HW 4/15 Lesson 20 - L20 CQ: 但女必须第付楼马 - L20: Let’s go Due: L20 HW Work on group final project 4/22 Lesson 21 - L21 CQ: 司实脑班意思愉平安运 - L21: Let’s go Assign #11: L21 HW - Introduction to Lesson 22 Practice characters: 因已经丽城市处新些方动 如 4/29 Lessons test: up to L22 & Final Oral Performance Exam 期末口试表演
xxvi
学期教学日程样本 (Quarter System)
82-131 Beginning Chinese I 初级汉语 (上) Sample Daily Schedule (Assuming a 10-week quarter)
The first quarter (e.g., Fall Quarter) of a three-quarter sequence covers the Foundation section and Lessons 1 through 7, along with review sections and lesson tests. Lessons 8 through 14, along with review sections and lesson tests, will be covered in the second quarter (e.g., Winter Quarter). Lessons 15 through 22, along with review sections and lesson tests, will be covered in the third quarter (Spring Quarter).
Autumn Quarter (through Lesson 7) HW: Homework Monday Week 1 9/19 - Class begins (course intro. Syllabus, etc.) - Map of China - Intro. to Chinese - Classroom Expressions (1) 1-14 - Classroom Expressions Practice (up to item 14)
Week 2 9/26 - Pinyin (6): Pinyin Review; Exe (6) Assign: Pinyin HW V & VI
Week 3 10/3 - Lesson 1 - L1 CQ: 我呢也他不 老师
Assign: Assignment Tuesday 9/20 - Classroom Expressions (2) 15-42 - Classroom Expressions Practice - Pinyin (1) a o e i u ü; b p m f; d t n l; Exe (1) - Pinyin (2): g k h; j q x; z c s; zh ch sh r; Exe (2) Assign: Pinyin HW I & II 9/27 - Review: Pinyin & Class Exp. - Test: Pinyin & Class Exp. Due: Pinyin HW V & VI 10/4 - Lesson 1 - L1: Let’s go - Foundation: Writing Chinese characters Due: L1 HW
Exe: Exercise
CQ: Character quiz
Wednesday 9/21 - Review Class Exp. - Pinyin (3): ai ei ao ou; ia iao ie iu; ua uo uai ui üe; Exe (3) - Pinyin (4): an en ian in uan un; ang eng ong iang ing iong uang; Exe (4) Assign: Pinyin HW III & IV
Friday 9/23 - Pinyin (5): Special Pinyin and tonal rules; Exe (5) Due: Pinyin HW I II, III, IV
9/28 - Intro. Lesson 1 Characters 你好是 学生吗
9/30 - Lesson 1 - L1 CQ 你好是学生 吗 Assign: L1 HW
10/5 - Lesson 2 - Intro. L2 characters
10/7 - Lesson 2 - L2 CQ: 您贵姓请问 的
xxvii
学期教学日程样本 (Quarter System) Monday Week 4 10/17 - Lesson 2 - L2 CQ: 英文名字中 叫 Assign: L2 HW Week 5 10/24 - Lesson 3 - L3 CQ: 法美说会一 点儿和 Assign: L3 HW Week 6 10/31 - Lesson 4 - L4 CQ: 太可功课多 们少 Assign: L4 HW Week 7 11/7 - Lesson 5 - L5 CQ: 朋友来介绍 下室
Week 8 11/14 - Lesson 6 - L6 CQ: 家大从在四 爸妈姐 Due: L5 HW Week 9 11/21 Test (4): L5+L6
Week 10 11/28 - Lesson 7 - L7 CQ: 二三五六七 八九手机校外 Due: L7 HW
Tuesday 10/18 - Lesson 2 - L2 CQ: 什么她谁同 - L2: Let’s go - Review: Lessons 1-2 10/25 - Lesson 3 - L3 Character Rev. - Lesson 3 exercises
Wednesday 10/19 Test (2): L1+L2 Due: L2 HW
Friday 10/21 - Lesson 3 - L3 CQ: 哪国人很对 了
10/26 - Lesson 3 - L3: Let’s go
11/1 - Lesson 4 - L4 exercises - L4: Let’s go
11/2 - Lesson 4 - Review: Lessons 3-4
10/28 - Lesson 4 - L4 CQ: 那书这本工 程难 Due: L3 HW 1/4 Test (3): L3+L4 Due: L4 HW
11/8 - Lesson 5 - L5 CQ: 有几两个都 常跟 - L5 Exercises Assign: L5 HW 11/15 - Lesson 6 - L6 CQ: 作男没辆车 只狗爱 Assign: L6 HW
11/9 - Lesson 5 - L5 Exercises - L5: Let’s go - Chinese song 中国歌 11/16 - Lesson 6 exercises - L6: Let’s go
11/22 - Lesson 7 - L7 CQ: 住宿舍号房 间电话小码 Assign: L7 HW 11/9 - L7: Let’s go - Review: Lessons 5-7 - Comprehensive Review
11/23 - Lesson 7 - Lesson 7 exercises
11/30 - Comprehensive Review
xxviii
11/11 Veterans’ Day, No Classes
11/18 - interview w/instructor; (up to L6); feedback 与老师面谈 Due: L6 HW 11/25 Thanksgiving Holiday, No classes 感恩节 [Gǎn’ēnjié], 不上课 12/2 Last day of classes Final Exam 期末考试
学期教学日程样本 (Quarter System)
Winter Quarter (Lessons 8–14) HW: Homework CQ: Character quiz
Assign: Assignment Exe: Exercise Oral Exe: In-class-oral exercises
Monday Week 1 1/2
Tuesday 1/3 - Class begins (course intro. Syllabus....) - Review previous lessons (up to lesson 7)
Week 2 1/9 - Lesson 8 - L8 CQ: 吃饭菜今天 次怎样行再见 - L8 exercises
1/10 - Lesson 8: Character Rev. - L8: Let’s go - Review L7-L8 Due: L8 HW 1/17 - Lesson 9 - L9 CQ: 网就位留言 时候晚要给 Assign: L9 HW 1/24 - Lesson 10 - L10 CQ: 分然图馆 午喜欢球写信
Week 3 1/16 Martin Luther King Day, No Classes 不上课 Week 4 1/23 - Lesson 10 - L10 CQ: 活期门每 床睡觉半才刻 Due: L9 HW Week 5 1/30 - Lesson 10 - L10: Let’s go Due: L10 HW Week 6 2/6 - Lesson 11 - L11 CQ: 先喝杯冰 水瓶乐面饺 Assign: L11 HW
Wednesday 1/4 - Review previous lessons (up to lesson 7) - Intro. Lesson 8 Assign: L8 HW 1/11 Test (5): L7+L8
Friday 1/6 - Lesson 8 - L8 CQ: 认识去上以 后事想回起
1/18 - Lesson 9 - L9 Character Rev. - L9: Let’s go
1/20 Review: Lessons 7-9
1/13 Lesson 9 - L9 CQ: 打喂等知道 谢吧忙正看视做
1/25 - Lesson 10 - L10 CQ: 子邮件地 址祝年月日 Assign: L10HW 1/31 2/1 - Review: up to Lesson Test (6): L9+L10 10
1/27 - interview w/instructor; feedback 与老师面谈
2/7 - Lesson 11 - L11 CQ: 盘炒十碗 汤双筷 - L11: Let’s go
2/10 - Lesson 11 - Oral Exe: in group, perform L9, L10 or L11 text from memory - Start Lesson 12 Due: L11 HW
2/8 - Lesson 11 - Oral Exe: in group, perform L9, 10 or L11 text from memory
xxix
2/3 - Lesson 11 - L11 CQ: 红茶还绿 服务员坐
学期教学日程样本 (Quarter System) Monday Week 7 2/13 - Lesson 12 - L12 CQ: 借明用得 场接妹飞玩 Assign: L12 HW
Tuesday 2/14 - Lesson 12 - L12 CQ: 到排挡开 应该题白色
Wednesday 2/15 - Lesson 12 - L12 CQ: 停习练能 进步 - L12: Let’s go
Week 8 2/20 Lesson test #1: L11+L12
2/21 - Lesson 13 - L13 CQ: 买衬衫店 条裙或者裤黄
Week 9 2/27 - Lesson 13 - L13: Let’s go Due: L13 HW
2/28 - Lesson 14 - L14 CQ: 岁空星过 为舞参加
Week 10 3/6 - L14: Let’s go - Review: Lessons 13-14 Due: L14 HW
3/7 Lesson text #2: L13+L14
2/22 - Lesson 13 - L13 CQ: 错比较穿 黑试帮让 Assign: L13 HW 3/1 - Lesson 14 - L14 CQ: 定蛋糕送 棒客气 Assign: L14 HW 3/8 - Comprehensive Review
Friday 2/17 - Lesson 12 Review: Lessons 11-12 Due: L12 HW 2/24 - Lesson 13 - L13 CQ: 钱块张影 票 3/3 - Lesson 14 - Lesson 14 exercises
3/10 - Last day of classes - Final exam
Spring Quarter (Lessons 15–22) HW: Homework CQ: Character quiz Monday Week 1 3/27 - Class begins (course intro. Syllabus, etc.) - Review previous lessons (up to Lesson 14) Week 2 4/3 - Lesson 15 - L15: Let’s go Due: L15 HW
Assign: Assignment Exe: Exercise Oral Exe: In-class-oral exercises
Tuesday 3/28 - Lesson 15 - L15 CQ: 前边迎观 里厨公旁走
Wednesday 3/29 - Lesson 15 - L15 CQ: 厅面餐洗 澡卧桌园真 Assign: L15 HW
Friday 3/31 - Lesson 15 - L15 exercises
4/4 - Lesson 16 - L16 CQ: 篮俩教游 泳非快体育池
4/5 - Lesson 16 - L16 CQ: 健身锻炼 现昨赛业包慢 Assign: L16 HW
4/7 - Lesson 16 - L16: Let’s go
xxx
学期教学日程样本 (Quarter System) Monday Week 3 4/10 Review: Lessons 15-16 - Oral Exe: in group, perform L15 or L16 text from memory Due: L16 HW Week 4 4/17 - Lesson 17 - Lesson 17 exercises Due: L17 HW
Tuesday 4/11 Lesson test #3: L15+L16
Wednesday 4/12 - Lesson 17 - L17 CQ: 春久放假 夏秋冬其最暖短热
Friday 4/4 - Lesson 17 - L17 CQ: 华氏百度 极刮风雨冷雪 Assign: L17 HW
4/18 - Lesson 17 - L17: Let’s go
4/19 - Lesson L18 - L18 CQ: 火旅离远 只钟骑自共汽
Week 5 4/24 - Lesson 18 - Lesson 18 exercises
4/25 - L18: Let’s go Review: Lessons 17-18 Due: L18 HW 5/2 - Lesson 19 - L19 CQ: 考复所医 药休息准备笔记 Assign: L17 HW 5/9 - Lesson 20 - L20 CQ: 但女必须 第付楼马 Assign: L20 HW 5/16 Lesson 21 - L21 CQ: 暑毕决申 研究院找司
4/26 Lesson test #4: L17+L18 Due: L18 HW
4/21 - Lesson L18 - L18 CQ: 路近西部 景船南听海租 Assign: L18 HW 4/28 - interview w/instructor; feedback 与老师面谈
5/23 - L22 CQ: 因已经丽 城市处新些方动如
5/24 Lesson 22 - L22 CQ: 京剧东笼 尝始高兴收心板保 重 Assign: L22 HW
Week 6 5/1 - Lesson 19 - L19 CQ: 感冒饿像 舒头疼发烧咳嗽病 - Lesson 19 Week 7 5/8 - Lesson 20 - L20 CQ:把带啊搬出 关系 Due: L19 HW Week 8 5/15 Lesson test #5: L19+L20 Due: L20 HW
Week 9 5/22 - Lesson 21 - L21: Let’s go Due: L21 HW
5/3 - Lesson 19 - L19 exercises
5/5 - Lesson 19 - L19: Let’s go
5/10 - Lesson 20 - L20 exercises
5/12 Lesson 20 - L20: Let’s go - Review: Lessons L19-20 5/19 - Lesson 21 - Oral Exe: in group, perform L19, L20 or L21 text from memory - Lesson 21 - L20: Let’s go 5/26 - Lesson 22 - L22 exercises
5/17 Lesson 21 - L21 CQ: 实脑班意 思愉平安运 Assign: L21 HW
xxxi
学期教学日程样本 (Quarter System) Monday Week 10 5/29 - Lesson 22 - L20: Let’s go - Review: Lessons 21-22 Due: L22 HW
Tuesday 5/30 Lesson test #6: L21+L22
Wednesday 5/31 - Comprehensive Review: Lessons 11-22
xxxii
Friday 6/2 - Last day of classes - Final Exam
Pinyin Exercises Answer
Pinyin Foundation
拼音练习 Pinyin Exercises
Pinyin Practice I Simple finals: a o e i u ü
Labial initials: b p m f
Alveolar initials: d t n l
F-2
Listen and choose the syllable you hear. Check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. tū tú tǔ tù 2. mō mó mǒ mò 3. lī lí lǐ lì 4. nā ná nǎ nà 5. lǖ lǘ lǚ lǜ 6. pō pó pǒ pò
F-5
Listen and choose the syllable you hear. Check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. lǔ nǚ 2. lù nù 3. dú dé 4. mā mō 5. mò mù 6. tā tē
Pinyin Homework I 1-1
1-2
1-3
Listen and choose the syllable you hear. 1. lǖ lǘ lǚ lǜ 5. dē dé dě 2. fū fú fǔ fù 6. mō mó mǒ 3. pī pí pǐ pì 7. tī tí tǐ 4. nā ná nǎ nà 8. bā bá bǎ Listen and choose the syllable you hear. 1. mù nù 4. lǔ nǔ 7. lǚ nǚ 2. pā tā 5. pà bà 8. bè tè 3. mó fó 6. tè lè 9. dí tí Listen and write the Pinyin for the syllables you hear. 1. fǔ 4. nǐ 7. má 10. nǚ 2. lǚ 5. dé 8. pú 11. pà 3. tà 6. bó 9. fà 12. bù
dè mò tì bà 10. nǐ 11. tā 12. pū
lǐ lā fū
Pinyin Practice II Velar initials: g k h Dental sibilant initials: z c s
Palatal initials: j q x Retroflex initials: zh ch sh r
F-11
Listen and choose the word you hear. Check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. shī sī 2. zhà chà 3. cā zā 4. xī sī 5. zhè zè 6. xì shì
F-12
Listen and write the initials you hear. Check your answers with a partner or the class. Listen again and repeat. Part I: 1. chē 2. qí 3. shà
F-1
Pinyin Exercises Answer
Pinyin Foundation
4. shī
5. xù
6. qú
Part II: 7. sè 10. zhé
8. shù 11. chě
9. chā 12. zǔ
Pinyin Homework II 2-1
2-2
Listen and choose the syllable you hear. 1. qì xì 5. cè chè 2. xī sī 6. zhè zè 3. shī sī 7. jī qī 4. jǐ xǐ 8. rì shì
9. zhà 10. zǔ 11. cǐ 12. shú
chà shǔ sǐ chú
Listen and fill in the blanks with the initial sounds you hear. 1. shē 6. qí 11. chà 2. xī 7. zù 12. zhú 3. chè 8. jì 13. qǐ 4. sī 9. cū 14. shè 5. cā 10. zē 15. rì
Pinyin Practice III Compound finals: ai ei ao ou
ia iao ie iu
ua uo uai ui üe
F-15
Listen and add the tone marks you hear. Check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. bié 2. huá 3. zhuā 4. shuò 5. lüè 6. cuì
F-18
Listen and choose the word you hear. Check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. jué xué 2. huó hóu 3. guò gòu 4. jiǔ xiǔ 5. lüè nüè 6. xuē xiē 7. shāo xiāo 8. rào ròu
Pinyin Homework III 3-1
Listen and mark the tones you hear. 1. lǎo 5. rèn 9. lüè 2. cuī 6. hòu 10. shuāi 3. zhuā 7. huá 11. kuò 4. liǔ 8. ǎi 12. péi
3-2
Listen and choose the syllables you hear. 1. chóu zhóu 6. cáo cái 2. chāo qiāo 7. lái léi 3. dōu duō 8. lín liú 4. jué xué 9. dāo dōu 5. huó hóu 10. diū duī
F-2
11. jiǎo 12. miè 13. lüè 14. xuē 15. rào
xiǎo mèi nüè xiē ròu
Pinyin Exercises Answer 3-3
Pinyin Foundation
Listen and fill in the blanks with the final sounds you hear. 1. bié 6. tài 11. hēi 2. piào 7. nuó 12. jiǎ 3. měi 8. láo 13. qiū 4. fǒu 9. guì 14. xiào 5. duì 10. kuài 15. zhái
Pinyin Practice IV Nasal finals: an en
ian in
uan un
ang eng ong
iang ing iong
uang
F-21
Listen and add the tone marks you hear. Check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. zhǔn 2. zhuāng 3. lùn 4. hěn 5. qiáng 6. róng
F-24
Listen and choose the word you hear. Check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. háng huáng 2. qiáng qióng 3. lín líng 4. tūn tuān 5. xiàng xuàn 6. shāo shōu 7. juān jūn 8. zhāng jiāng
F-25
Listen and write the finals you hear. Check your answers with a partner or the class. Listen again and pronounce the words. 1. kuāng 2. xún 3. zǒng 4. jiǒng 5. quē 6. sāng
Pinyin Homework IV 4-1
4-2
4-3
Listen and mark the tones you hear. 1. jiǒng 6. lùn 2. xiān 7. rǒng 3. hǔn 8. fēn 4. àn 9. cáng 5. qīn 10. miǎn
11. hèn 12. qiáng 13. héng 14. liàng 15. lǐng
Listen and choose the syllables you hear. 1. juān jūn 6. lín líng 2. zhèn shèn 7. tūn tuān 3. qiáng qióng 8. rēng zhēng 4. xiàng xuàn 9. kàn kèn 5. rǎn zhǎn 10. qǐng xǐng
11. xióng 12. zhàn 13. háng 14. huán 15. jūn
Listen and fill in the blanks with the final sounds you hear. 1. biān 6. tuān 11. hóng 2. píng 7. nín 12. jiàn 3. mǎn 8. lùn 13. qíng 4. fèng 9. gāng 14. xióng 5. dǒng 10. kuāng 15. zhēn
F-3
qióng zhèn huáng huáng qūn
Pinyin Exercises Answer
Pinyin Foundation
Pinyin Practice V Special Pinyin and Tone Rules F-27
Listen and write the finals you hear. Listen again and mark the tones you hear. 1. yǒu 2. juǎn 3. nǚ 4. huí 5. zhuāng 6. chūn
F-29
Listen and repeat the following, paying attention to the tone change rules for yi (一) and bu (不). 1. yígè one 一个 2. yíwàn ten thousand 一万 3. yíkuài dollar 一块 4. yìmáo ten cents 一毛 5. búshì is not 不是 6. bùxiǎng don’t want 不想 7. bùduō not many 不多 8. búdà not big 不大 9. yí lùpíng’ān have a safe trip 一路平安 10. yì fānfēngshùn have a good innings 一帆风顺 11. bú jìnzétuì not to advance is to go back 不进则退 12. bù xiāngshàngxià be equally matched 不相上下
Pinyin Homework V 5-1
Listen and fill in the blanks with the Pinyin for the words you hear. 1. yě 6. zhuī 11. cún 2. yuán 7. xiǔ 12. gùn 3. wèn 8. tuǐ 13. xún 4. wǎng 9. jiū 14. quàn 5. yà 10. niǔ 15. liù
5-2
Listen and mark the tones you hear for each “yi” (一) and “bu” (不) below. Be sure to remember the “yi-bu” tonal rules. 1. yìwǔyìshí 6. bùwénbúwèn 11. yìsībùgǒu 一五一十 不闻不问 一丝不苟 2. yìxīnyíyì 7. bùmíngbùbái 12. yìchéngbúbiàn 一心一意 不明不白 一成不变 3. yìzhāoyìxī 8. bùzhébúkòu 13. yìwénbùzhí 一朝一夕 不折不扣 一文不值 4. yíchàngyíhè 9. bùsānbúsì 14. yíqiàobùtōng 一唱一和 不三不四 一窍不通 5. yìmóyíyàng 10. bùbēibúkàng 15. yìchénbùrǎn 一模一样 不卑不亢 一尘不染
Pinyin Practice VI Comprehensive Pinyin Review F-33
Listen and choose the word you hear. Check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. lǔ nǚ 2. lián liáng 3. xià xiào 4. xiōng jiōng 5. jié zéi 6. lǚ liǔ F-4
Pinyin Exercises Answer F-34
Pinyin Foundation
Listen and write the Pinyin you hear for the following classroom expressions. Check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. Dàjiā hǎo. (大家好。) 2. Shàng kè. (上课。) 3. Zhōngwén zěnme shuō? (中文怎么说？) 4. Méi yǒu wèntí. (没有问题。) 5. dì sì shēng (第四声)
Pinyin Homework VI 6-1
6-2
Listen and choose the words you hear. 1. dàng dèng 6. lǚ 2. lǔ nǚ 7. bīn 3. wō ōu 8. niè 4. jié zéi 9. dōu 5. jūn zhēn 10. zuō
liǔ bīng lèi tōu cuō
11. yǔ 12. lián 13. xiōng 14. kǒu 15. xià
Listen and write the Pinyin for the classroom expressions you hear. 1. Lǎoshī hǎo. 老师好。 2. Bú kèqi. 不客气。 3. Zài jiàn. 再见。 4. Yǒu wèntí ma? 有问题吗？ 5. Qǐng nǐ zài shuō yíbiàn. 请你再说一遍。 6. Qǐng kàn dì yī tí. 请看第一题。
F-5
yǒu liáng jiōng gǒu xiào
Writing and Character Practice Answer
Pinyin Foundation
汉字入门练习 Writing and Character Practice
F-36
Look at the following characters and locate the radicals. What do the radicals mean? Refer to the lists of common radicals on page F-23 for help (Section II, part 1, “Common Radicals”). 1. 驾 2. 轮 3. 劈 4. 枝 5. 聪 6. 期 jià lún pī zhī cōng qī to drive wheel cleave branch clever period 马 车 刀 木 耳 月 horse vehicle knife wood ear moon
F-37
Look at the following characters and locate the radicals. What do the radicals mean? Refer the list of changed radical forms on page F-24 for help (Section II, part 2, “Changed Radical Forms”). 1. 信 2. 踢 3. 拔 4. 煎 5. 海 6. 割 xìn tī bá jiān hǎi gē believe kick pull fry sea cut 亻 足 扌 火 氵 刂 person foot hand fire water knife
F-38
Match the following changed radicals with their original characters. What do the radicals mean? Refer to the list of changed radical forms on page F-24 for help (Section II, part 2, “Changed Radical Forms”). c. fire 1. 火 a. 扌 e. water 2. 水 b. 刂 f. heart 3. 心 c. 灬 b. knife 4. 刀 d. 亻 a. hand 5. 手 e. 氵 d. person 6. 人 f. 忄
F-39
Look at the following characters and locate the radicals. What do the radicals mean? Refer to the list of radicals on page F-25 for help (Section II, part 3, “Other Radicals”). 1. 钉 2. 衫 3. 饱 4. 烧 5. 神 6. 寓 dīng shān bǎo shāo shén yù nail jacket full burn god apartment 金 衤 食 火 礻 宀 metal clothes food fire god roof
F-40
Write the first stroke for each of the following characters. The first has been done as an example. 1. 交 丶 2. 月 丿 3. 水 丨 4. 去一 5. 中 丨 6. 不 一 7. 他 丿 8. 洪 丶 9. 吃 丨 10. 代 丨
F-6
Classroom Expressions Practice Answer
Pinyin Foundation
课堂用语练习 Classroom Expressions Practice
Do the following exercises with a partner to help you practice and gain familiarity with the classroom expressions. Refer to the expressions on pages F-30-F-31 for help. F-42
Match the following expressions with their meanings. Practice saying the phrases. i 1. Nǐ hǎo a. Goodbye. f 2. Shàng kè b. Class dismissed. e 3. Bú duì d. Correct. d 4. Duì (le) e. Incorrect. b 5. Xià kè f. Class is starting. h 6. Bù dǒng g. I understand. g 7. Dǒng le h. I don’t understand. a 8. Zài jiàn i. Hello.
F-43
Listen to the following classroom expressions and choose the meaning. Practice saying the phrases. 1. 大家好。 a. Hello, everyone. b. Correct. c. Goodbye. 2. 请打开书。 a. I understand. b. Please open your books. c. Goodbye. 3. 懂了吗？ a. Do you understand? b. Please read aloud. c. Class dismissed. 4. 请你念。 a. Any questions? b. I understand. c. Please read aloud. 5. 有问题吗？ a. Hello. b. Incorrect. c. Any questions?
F-7
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 1 Greetings
第一课 问候 Lesson 1 Greetings 补充课文
SUPPLEMENTARY PRACTICE
Read the following statements and choose whether they are true or false. 1. The speaker introduces a student.
True
False
2. The speaker is a teacher.
True
False
3. The speaker asks if you are a professor.
True
False
I. Listening Exercises 1-1
1-2
1-3
Listen and choose the word you hear. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. tā/dā
2. lǎo/nǎo
3. bō/pō
4. wǔ/nǔ
5. hé/gé
6. xī/xū
7. yuè/yè
8. wǒ/wǔ
9. nǐ/nǎ
10. hái/huí
Listen and choose the word you hear. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. bú/bó
2. láo/lái
3. shān/shēn
4. mà/mù
5. shì/shè
6. xuē/xū
7. yuè/yàng
8. wǎn/wǔ
9. nǐ/niǔ
10. huái/huí
Listen and add the tone marks you hear. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. hǎo
2. lǎoshī
3. nǐ
4. tā
5. bù
6. yě
7. xuésheng
8. shì
9. wǒ
10. ne
II. Character Exercises 1-5
1-6
Match each Chinese character with its meaning. Then check your answers with a partner. d
1. 老师
a. student
e
2. 你好
b. and you
f
3. 不
c. also
b
4. 你呢
d. teacher
c
5. 也
e. hello
a
6. 学生
f. not
Write the correct character or Pinyin on the lines below. The first one is done as an example. Notice how the phrases vary and build to the final sentence as you check your answers with a partner. 1.
学 生 xué sheng
2.
他 是 学 生。 Tā shì xué sheng.
3.
他 不 是 学 生。 Tā bú shì xué sheng.
4.
他 也 不 是 学 生。 Tā yě bú shì xué sheng.
1
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 1 Greetings
III. Grammar Exercises With a partner, use 也, 不, or 是 to complete and practice the following dialogue.
1-8
1.
A: 你是学生吗？
2.
B: 我是学生。你也是学生吗？
3.
A: 不，我不是学生，我是老师。他也是老师。 B: 老师好！
With a partner, use 吗 or 呢 to complete and practice the following dialogue.
1-9
1.
A: 你好！你是学生吗？
2.
B: 是，你呢？你也是学生吗？ A: 不，我不是学生。我是老师。 B: 他也是老师吗？
3.
A: 不，他是学生。
文化点滴
CULTURE NOTES
Do you know … •
how to respond to the morning greeting 早！[zǎo] (Morning!)?
•
how to respond if someone greets you with 你好吗？ [Nǐ hǎo ma] (How are you?)?
•
what the three types of Chinese greetings are and how they differ? (1) exchanged greetings,
E.g. 你好！
Answer: 你好！
(2) question-and-answer greetings,
E.g. 你好吗？
Answer: 很好。
(3) stating the obvious as a greeting.
E.g. 买菜啊？
Answer: 嗯，买菜。
趣味中文
FUN WITH CHINESE
Work in small groups or with your class. 2. Which character in the saying did you learn in this lesson? Write it on the line and use it in a sentence. 学
你是学生吗？
2
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 1 Greetings
第一课 问候 Lesson 1 Greetings I. Listening Exercises 1-1
Listen to the dialogue between Mary and John. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. Mary: 你好！ John:
你好！
Mary: 我是学生，你也是学生吗？ John:
1-2
不。我是老师。
1. Mary 是学生。
True
False
2. John 也是学生。
True
False
3. Mary 是老师。
True
False
4. John 是老师。
True
False
Listen to the dialogue again and write it in Pinyin. Mary: Nǐhǎo! John: Nǐhǎo! Mary: Wǒ shì xuésheng, nǐ yě shì xuésheng ma? John: Bù. Wǒ shì lǎoshī.
1-3
Listen to the challenge dialogue. Though there may be some words and phrases that are unfamiliar to you, see if you can understand the general meaning by using what you have learned. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. A: 你好！ B: 你好！ A: 请问，你是学生吗？ B: 不是，我不是学生。我是老师，你呢？ A: 我也是老师，不是学生。
1-4
1. They greet each other.
True
False
2. They are both students.
True
False
Listen to the challenge dialogue again and choose the best answer for each of the following questions. 1. Which statement best describes the speakers? a. Both of them are teachers. b. One is a student, and the other is a teacher. c. One is a student and the other one is a teacher as well as a student.
II. Character Exercises 1-5
Match each Pinyin sentence with its Chinese characters. d 1. Tā yě bú shì xuésheng.
a. 你也是学生吗？
c 2. Wǒ shì xuésheng. Nǐ ne?
b. 他是老师吗？
3
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
1-6
Lesson 1 Greetings
a 3. Nǐ yě shì xuésheng ma?
c. 我是学生。你呢？
e 4. Wǒ bú shì lǎoshī.
d. 他也不是学生。
b 5. Tā shì lǎoshī ma?
e. 我不是老师。
Write the Chinese characters for the following words. 1. he 他
4. I 我
7. not 不
2. good 好
5. also 也
8. you 你
3. teacher 老师
6. student 学生
III. Grammar Exercises 1-7
Complete the following sentences using the clues given in parentheses. 1. 你好。(a greeting) 2. 我是学生。(is a student) 3. 你也是学生吗？(is also) 4. 他也不是老师。(is not) 5. 你呢？(“and you?”) 你也不是老师吗？(also is not)
1-8
1-9
Match each question with the response that best answers the question. c 1. 你是学生吗？
a. 他不是老师。
d 2. 我学中文，你呢？
b. 我也不是老师。
a 3. 他是老师吗？
c. 我是学生。
b 4. 我不是老师，你呢？
d. 我也学中文。
Rewrite each of the following sentences. Include the words in parentheses. 1. 他学生。(是) 他是学生。 2. 我是学生，你是学生？(也﹑吗) 我是学生，你也是学生吗？ 3. 他是老师，他学生。(不﹑是) 他不是老师，他是学生。
IV. Comprehensive Exercises 1-10
Number the sentences of the following dialogue in the correct order. 1 1. A: 你好！ 4 2. B: 我不是学生，你呢？ 3 3. A: 你是学生吗？ 6 4. B: 他也是学生吗？ 7 5. A: 不是，他是老师。 2 6. B: 你好！ 5 7. A: 我是学生。
4
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
1-11
Lesson 1 Greetings
Using what you have learned in this lesson, complete the following dialogue. A: 你好！ B: (1) 你好！ A: 我是学生，(2) 你呢？ B: 我不是学生，(3) 我是老师。 A: 他 (4) 也是老师吗？ B: 是，(5) 他也是老师。
5
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
第二课
Lesson 2 Names
名字
Lesson 2 Names 补充课文
SUPPLEMENTARY PRACTICE
Read the following statements and choose whether they are true or false. 1. The speaker’s English name is Mary Wood.
True
False
2. The speaker asks what your last name is.
True
False
3. Yu Ying is the speaker’s teacher.
True
False
I. Listening Exercises 2-1
2-2
2-3
Listen and choose the word you hear. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. nín/lín
2. wén/mén
3. xǐng/qǐng
4. zì/zhì
5. níng/míng
6. qiào/jiào
7. tǒng/dǒng
8. miǎo/xiǎo
9. yìng/xìng
10. shénme/zěnme
Listen and choose the word you hear. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. guǐ/gěi
2. yīng/yīn
3. shén/shéi
4. wài/wèi
5. mén/mín
6. jiào/jiù
7. zì/cì
8. xǐng/xiǎo
9. tóng/tíng
10. mèi/miàn
Listen and add the tone marks you hear. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. míngzi
2. tóngxué
3. qǐng
4. Yīngwén
5. shénme
6. nín shì
7. shéi
8. guìxìng
9. Zhōngwén
10. jiào
II. Character Exercises 2-5
2-6
Write the Chinese characters for the following words. Then check your answers with a partner. 1. name 名字
2. please 请
3. who 谁
4. to ask 问
5. surname 姓
6. English 英文
7. to call 叫
8. what 什么
Write the correct character or Pinyin on the lines below. The first one is done as an example. Notice how the phrases vary and build to the final sentence as you check your answers with a partner. 1. 名 字 míng zi 2. 什 么 名 字 shén me míng zi 3. 你 叫 什 么 名 字？ nǐ jiào shén me míng zi? 4. 你 的 老 师 叫 什 么 名 字？ nǐ de lǎo shī jiào shén me míng zi? 5. 你 的 中 文 老 师 叫 什 么 名 字？ nǐ de Zhōng wén lǎo shī jiào shén me míng zi?
6
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 2 Names
III. Grammar Exercises 2-9
With a partner, take turns asking and answering as many questions as you can for each of the sentences below. Use the words from the box when asking questions. 1. 她是李小英。 a. 她是李小英吗？ b. 谁是李小英？ c. 她是谁？ d. 她叫什么名字？ e. 她的名字是什么？ 2. 我姓吴。 a. 你姓吴吗？ b. 谁姓吴？ c. 你姓什么？ 3. 我的老师的名字是于文中。 a. 你的老师的名字是于文中吗？ b. 谁的老师的名字是于文中？ c. 你的老师的名字是什么？ d. 谁的名字是于文中？ 4. 我的同学姓文，他的中文名字是文同生。 a. 你的同学姓文吗？
e. 他的中文名字是文同生吗？
b. 谁姓文？
f. 谁的中文名字是文同生？
c. 谁的同学姓文？
g. 他的什么名字是文同生？
d. 你的同学姓什么？
h. 他的中文名字是什么？
文化点滴 CULTURE NOTES Do you know … •
how to tell what the surname is when you see a Chinese person’s name? Key: The surname usually infront the given name.
•
if the surname usually comes from the father or the mother in Chinese culture? Key: The surname usually comes from the father.
•
what Chinese parents consider when choosing a name for a child? Key: The given names usually reflect the parents’ hopes for the child. E.g., for boys, honor, success, strength, bravery, and brilliance are common themes while girls’ names are usually related to beauty, purity, and elegance.
Common one-syllable Chinese surnames: Zhào
Qián
Sūn
Lǐ
Féng
Chén
Chǔ
Wèi
Zhū
Qín
Yóu
Xǔ
赵
钱
孙
李
冯
陈
禇
卫
朱
秦
尤
许
Kǒng
Cáo
Yán
Huà
Qī
Xiè
Zōu
Yù
Shào
Sū
Pān
Gě
孔
曹
严
华
戚
谢
邹
喻
邵
苏
潘
葛
7
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 2 Names
Zhōu
Wú
Zhèng
Wáng
Jiǎng
Shěn
Hán
Yáng
Xuē
Lǚ
Shī
Zhāng
周
吴
郑
王
蒋
沈
韩
杨
薛
吕
施
张
Jīn
Wèi
Táo
Jiāng
Léi
Hè
Dòu
Zhāng
Rén
Fàn
Péng
Láng
金
魏
陶
姜
雷
贺
窦
章
任
范
彭
郎
Yú
Tián
Yáo
Lín
Dīng
Yú
Fāng
Huáng
Hé
Gāo
Xià
Kē
于
田
姚
林
丁
余
方
黄
何
高
夏
柯
Bāo
Xú
Liáng
Zhōng
Hú
Hóng
Cuī
Liú
Qiáo
Liǔ
Gān
Dèng
包
徐
梁
钟
胡
洪
崔
刘
乔
柳
甘
邓
Máo
Jiāng
Zhān
Zhuāng
Gǒng
Niú
Zēng
Yóu
Bì
Wū
Guō
Móu
毛
江
詹
庄
巩
牛
曾
游
毕
巫
郭
牟
Xiè
Dài
Dǒng
Láo
Qiū
Mò
Jiǎ
Miáo
Shǐ
Tāng
Mèng
Táng
谢
戴
董
劳
邱
莫
贾
苗
史
汤
孟
唐
Common two-syllable Chinese surnames: Sīmǎ
Ōuyáng
Xiàhóu
Zhūgě
Huángfǔ
司 马
欧 阳
夏 侯
诸 葛
皇 甫
Dōngfāng
Lìnghú
Duānmù
Shàngguān
Gōngsūn
东 方
令 狐
端 木
上 官
公 孙
趣味中文
FUN WITH CHINESE
2. Which characters in the saying did you learn in this lesson? Write them on the lines and use them in a sentence. 同, 名, 姓
行动吧！LET’S GO! Answer the following questions with your partner or group. 1. What is the student’s name? 王大中 2. What is his major? 英文 3. What is his student ID number? 88990
8
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 2 Names
第二课 名字 Lesson 2 Names
I. Listening Exercises 2-1
Listen to the dialogue for each question. Then choose the best answer for each question. Dialogue 1 A: 你好！请问您贵姓？ B: 我姓吴。 Dialogue 2 小美：文英，你好。他是你的老师吗？ 文英：你好，小美。他是我的同学。他叫李大中。 Dialogue 3 A: 请问，您是于英吗？ B: 不是。我是于英的老师。我的名字是吴小文。 1. What is the person’s surname? a. Hú
b. Lú
c. Wú
2. Which of the following is true? a. Wenying is a teacher. b. Xiaomei’s classmate is a teacher. c. Dazhong Li is Wenying’s classmate. 3. Which of the following is true? a. Yu Ying’s teacher is Xiaowen Wu. b. Yu Ying is a teacher. c. Yu Ying is the man’s name. 2-2
Listen to the challenge dialogue. Though there may be some words and phrases that are unfamiliar to you, see if you can understand the general meaning by using what you have learned. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. A: 对不起，请问您是中文老师吗？ B: 噢，我不是中文老师，我是学生。你呢？你也是学生吗？ A: 是，我也是学生。请问你叫什么名字？ B: 我姓王，我叫王文，你呢？ A: 我叫美英，我的英文名字是 May。你知道中文老师贵姓吗？ B: 我知道，中文老师姓李，李老师的英文名字是 Thomas Li。 1. They tell each other their names.
True
False
2. The male speaker’s name is Wang Wen.
True
False
9
SAM Answer (Simplified Version) 2-3
Lesson 2 Names
Listen to the challenge dialogue again and choose the best answer for each of the following questions. 1. What’s May’s Chinese name? a. Wang Wen
c. Xiaoying
b. Meiying
d. Xiaomei
2. What is the Chinese teacher’s surname? a. His surname is Li.
c. His surname is Wu.
b. His surname is Wang.
d. His surname is Wen.
II. Character Exercises 2-4
Each of the following sets of characters has a common radical. Write the common radical on the line for each set.
2-5
2-6
1. 好
她
姓
女
2. 吗
叫
呢
口
3. 请
谁
言
Match each simplified character with its traditional form. e
1. 学
a. 誰
a
2. 谁
b. 師
d
3. 吗
c. 問
c
4. 问
d. 嗎
b
5. 师
e. 學
Write the Chinese characters for the following sentences. 1. Qǐngwèn, nín shì Lǐ lǎoshī ma? 请问，您是李老师吗？ 2. Nǐde tóngxué jiào shénme míngzi? 你的同学叫什么名字？
III. Grammar Exercises 2-7
Use the words in the box to write two positive statements, two negative statements, and two questions. You may use each word as many times as you need. 叫，您，姓，名字，中文，是，请问，我，老师，她，的， 同学，不，什么，吗 请问，您姓什么？
您是不是姓李？
我姓李。我叫学文。
不，我姓吴。
她叫什么名字？
您的中文名字是什么？
她叫小美。
我的中文名字是李学文。
您是她的同学吗？
吴老师，她是您的学生吗？
不，我是老师。
是。
10
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
2-8
Lesson 2 Names
Write questions for the following answers. The underlined words provide clues as to what your questions should focus on. 1. 我姓吴。
你姓什么？
2. 她叫李小英。
谁叫李小英？
3. 他是我的同学。
他是谁？
4. 我的中文名字是于文汉。
你的中文名字是什么？
IV. Comprehensive Exercises 2-9
2-10
Translate the following phrases into Chinese. 1. My teacher’s name
我老师的名字
2. His classmates
他的同学
3. Wenzhong Li’s student
李文中的学生
4. Your Chinese name
你的中文名字
5. Her student’s Chinese name
她学生的中文名字
Complete the following dialogue. A: 你好！请问，(1) 您贵姓？ B: 我 (2) 姓李，(3) 叫学文。你呢？ A: (4) 我叫吴小英。我 (5) 是学生。 B: 她是 (6) 谁？她 (7) 也是学生吗？ A: 不，她是 (8) 老师。 B: 她是 (9) 你的中文老师吗？ A: 不，(10) 她是我的英文老师。
11
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
第三课
Lesson 3 Nationalities and Languages
国籍和语言
Lesson 3 Nationalities and Languages 语法
GRAMMAR
I. 国名和国人 One syllable + 国 country
Pinyin
meaning
美国
Měiguó
United States
德国
Déguó
Germany
英国
Yīngguó
Britain
泰国
Tàiguó
Thailand
中国
Zhōngguó
China
韩国
Hánguó
Korea
法国
Fǎguó
France
俄国
Éguó
Russia
Èguó (pronunciation in Taiwan) More than two syllables (without 国) country
Pinyin
meaning
日本
Rìběn
Japan
越南
Yuènán
Vietnam
印尼
Yìnní
Indonesia
印度
Yìndù
India
伊朗
Yīlǎng
Iran
伊拉克
Yīlākè
Iraq
西班牙
Xībānyá
Spain
墨西哥
Mòxīgē
Mexico
加拿大
Jiānádà
Canada
新加坡
Xīnjiāpō
Singapore
意大利 (義大利)
Yìdàlì
Italy
马来西亚
Mǎláixīyà
Malaysia
To indicate a person from a certain country, simply add 人 after the country name. people
Pinyin
meaning
美国人
Měiguórén
American person or people
德国人
Déguórén
German person or people
英国人
Yīngguórén
British person or people
泰国人
Tàiguórén
Thai person or people
中国人
Zhōngguórén
Chinese person or people
日本人
Rìběnrén
Japanese person or people
法国人
Fǎguórén
French person or people
越南人
Yuènánrén
person or people from Vietnam
12
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 3 Nationalities and Languages
印尼人
Yìnnírén
Indonesian person or people
印度人
Yìndùrén
Indian person or people
伊朗
Yīlǎng
Iranian person or people
伊拉克
Yīlākè
Iraqi person or people
西班牙人
Xībānyárén
Spanish person or people
墨西哥人
Mòxīgērén
Mexican person or people
加拿大人
Jiānádàrén
Canadian person or people
意大利人 (義大利人)
Yìdàlìrén
Italian person or people
韩国人
Hánguórén
Korean person or people
新加坡人
Xīnjiāpōrén
person or people from Singapore
马来西亚人
Mǎláixīyàrén
Malaysian person or people
补充课文
SUPPLEMENTARY PRACTICE
Answer the following questions about the passage. 1. 他是美国人吗？他是美国人。 2. 他会说什么语言？他会说英文和法文，也会说一点儿中文。 3. 他的中文老师是哪国人？他的中文老师是中国人。 4. 他的老师说什么语言？他的老师说中文和一点儿英文。
I. Listening Exercises 3-1
3-2
Listen and choose the word you hear. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. nǎguó / Fǎguó
2. liàn Zhōngwén / niàn Zhōngwén
3. suō / shuō
4. Tàiyǔ / Dàyǔ
5. Rìběn / Lìběn
6. Déwén / Éwén
Listen and choose the word you hear. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. Měiguó / Měiguō
2. yìrén / yīrén
3. nàběn / nǎběn
4. Fāguó / Fǎguó
5. shuòshì / shǒushì
6. Hànyǔ / Hányǔ
II. Character Exercises 3-4
Match each Chinese phrase with its English meaning. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. d. 1. 谁说英文
a. which country
shéi shuō Yīngwén f. 2. 会说英文
b. can’t speak French
huì shuō Yīngwén e. 3. 哪国人
c. American
nǎ guó rén a. 4. 哪国
d. who speaks English
nǎ guó c. 5. 美国人
e. which nationality
Měiguórén
13
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version) b. 6. 不会说法文
Lesson 3 Nationalities and Languages f. can speak English
bú huì shuō Fǎwén 3-5
Write the correct character or Pinyin on the lines below. The first one is done as an example. Notice how the phrases vary and build to the final sentence as you check your answers with a partner. 1. 人 rén 2. 国 人 guó rén 3. 美 国 人 Měi guó rén 4. 我 不 是 美 国 人。 Wǒ bú shì Měi guó rén. 5. 我 不 是 英 国 人，也 不 是 美 国 人。 Wǒ bú shì Yīng guó rén, yě bú shì Měi guó rén.
III. Grammar Exercises 3-7
Work with a partner. For each country below, write the Chinese characters for the nationality and language and then find the country’s flag. Country
Nationality
Language
1.
中国
中国人
中文/(汉语)
a.
2.
日本
日本人
日文/日语
b.
3.
英国
英国人
英文/英语
c.
4.
美国
美国人
英文/英语
d.
5.
加拿大
加拿大人
英文/英语
e.
6.
法国
法国人
法文/法语
f.
7.
德国
德国人
德文/德语
g.
3-9
Use appropriate words from the box to complete the following sentences. Then check your answers with a partner. 叫 会
说
是 不
也
1. 我是中国人。 2. 她会说英文，也会说一点儿法文。
14
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 3 Nationalities and Languages
3. 他叫李中，他是美国人。 4. 我叫吴英。我是法国人。我说法语。 5. 小文是英国人。他不会说日文，他会说英文。他也会说一点儿中文。
文化点滴
CULTURE NOTES
Do you know … •
how the Chinese use of hometown differs from its use in English? Key: “家乡” refers to the place where your family originally came while “hometown” refers to where you were born or grew up.
•
what townsmen societies are and what their goals are? Key: The major goal of townsman societies oversea is to help fellow townsmen in difficulty.
•
what the phrase “fallen leaves settle on their roots” means? Key: “叶落归根” means “fallen leaves settle on their roots”. Many Chinese would like to visit their hometown (家乡) at least once in their lifetime no matter where they are or how many generations separate them from it.
趣味中文
FUN WITH CHINESE
Work in small groups or with your class. 3. Take a closer look at these two characters: 远 and 近 Though they have different meanings and pronunciation, they have something in common. What do they have in common? What do you think the common point might represent? Pinyin
English
Chinese phrases
Radical
远
yuǎn
far
远方
辵
近
jìn
near
附近
辵
行动吧！LET’S GO! Answer the following questions with your partner or group. 1. Mary 的中文名字叫什么？
李文英
2. 她是哪国人？
英国人
3. 她会说什么语言？
英文，西班牙文，法文，德文
15
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 3 Nationalities and Languages
第三课 国籍和语言 Lesson 3 Nationalities and Languages I. Listening Exercises 3-1
Listen to the short passage and then choose the best answer for each of the following questions. 我姓李，我叫李文英。我是美国人。我说英文，我会说一点儿法文和一点儿中文。我的老师是方老 师。他是日本人。他也会说英文和一点儿法文。
1. What is Li Wenying’s nationality? a. Chinese b. American c. Korean 2. What languages can Li Wenying speak? a. She can speak English, Chinese and Japanese. b. She can speak English, some French and Chinese. c. She can speak both Chinese and Japanese. 3. Who is Li Wenying’s teacher? a. Fang laoshi b. Li laoshi c. Wang laoshi 4. Where is her teacher from? a. He is from China. b. He is from Japan. c. He is from Korea. 5. What languages can her teacher speak? a. He can speak English and a little French. b. He can only speak English and Chinese. c. He cannot speak French. 3-2
Listen to the challenge dialogue. Though there may be some words and phrases that are unfamiliar to you, see if you can understand the general meaning by using what you have learned. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. 文中：小美，那个学生，你猜他是哪国人？ 小美：我猜他是韩国人。 文中：不对，我猜他是日本人，不是韩国人。 小美：那，我们过去问问他吧。 小美：你好，这是文中，我是小美。 国英：你们好，我是国英。 文中：国英，请问你会说日文吗？ 国英：会，我会说日文。 小美：那，你会说韩语吗？ 国英：会，我也会说韩语。
16
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 3 Nationalities and Languages
文中：你是日本人还是韩国人？ 国英：都不是，我不是日本人，也不是韩国人。我是在美国出生的，我是美国人。
3-3
1. Guoying is Korean.
True
False
2. Guoying is Japanese.
True
False
3. Guoying can speak Korean.
True
False
Listen to the challenge dialogue again and choose the best answer for each of the following questions. 1. What languages can Guoying speak? a. He can speak Korean but not Japanese. b. He can speak Japanese but not Korean. c. He can speak both Korean and Japanese. 2. What is Guoying’s nationality? a. He is Korean. b. He is Japanese. c. He is Chinese. d. He is American.
II. Character Exercises 3-4
3-5
Look at the pictures and identify the nationality of each person. 1. 中国人
3. 英国人
2. 美国人
4. 法国人
Write as many characters as you can that use the following radicals. 1. 言
说 请 谁
2. 女
她 好 姓
3. 口
和 哪 呢 吗 叫
III. Grammar Exercises 3-6
Complete the following sentences, using the clues given in parentheses. 1. 你是哪国人？ 我是英国人。 2. 我是中国人。 我说中文。 3. 他是老师。 他教英文。 4. 我会说英文。 我也会说法文。
3-7
Complete the following sentences. 1. 小文是中国人，他会说中文。 2. 李小美是法国人，她不会说英文，她说法文。 3. 她是美国人，她说英文，她也说一点儿日文。
17
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
第四课
Lesson 4 Studies
学习
Lesson 4 Studies 补充课文
SUPPLEMENTARY PRACTICE
Read the following statements and choose whether they are true or false. 1. 美英 is a college student.
True
False
2. She studies English literature.
True
False
3. She thinks Chinese literature is very hard.
True
False
4. There is lots of homework for the class.
True
False
5. She is a freshman.
True
False
I. Listening Exercises 4-1
Listen and complete each word with the Pinyin you hear. Then check your answers with a partner or the class.
4-2
1. zhuān yè
2. kǎo shì
3. zuò yè
4. gōng kè
5. kuài jì
6. wén xué
7. gōng chéng
8. róng yì
9. bù shǎo
Listen and add the tone marks you hear. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. kèchéng
2. shùxué
3. yīnyuè
4. duōshǎo
5. tài nán
6. kěnéng
7. wénxué shū
8. zhèxiē
II. Character Exercises 4-4
Write the correct character or Pinyin on the lines below. The first one is done as an example. Notice how the phrases vary and build to the final sentence as you check your answers with a partner. 1. 书 shū 2. 什 么 书 shén me shū 3. 工 程 书 gōng chéng shū 4. 谁 的 工 程 书 shéi de gōng chéng shū 5. 同 学 的 工 程 书 tóng xué de gōng chéng shū 6. 我 的 同 学 的 工 程 书 wǒ de tóng xué de gōng chéng shū 7. 那 是 我 的 同 学 的 工 程 书。 nà shì wǒ de tóng xué de gōng chéng shū.
18
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version) 4-5
Lesson 4 Studies
Match each Chinese sentence with its English meaning. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. d
1. 功课很多。
a. He studies engineering.
c
2. 那是一本英国文学书。
b. This is my Chinese book.
a
3. 他学工程。
c. That is an English literature book.
b
4. 这是我的中文书。
d. There is a lot of homework.
文化点滴
CULTURE NOTES
Do you know … •
who Confucius was and what his main beliefs were? Key: Confucius is the founder of Confucianism. He was born in 551 BC. He was an educator, a philosopher, and a thinker whose thoughts and philosophy has influenced China and many other countries for thousand of years. He advocated loyalty to the emperor, filial piety to the parents, benevolence to all and faithfulness to friends.
•
what the key to real knowledge is, according to Confucius? Key: To learn and think. He said “He who learns but does not think is lost. He who thinks but does not learn is in great danger”.
•
what the most important exam is in China now? Key: The National Entrance Exam.
趣味中文
FUN WITH CHINESE
Work in small groups or with your class. 2. Which character in the saying did you learn in this lesson? Write it on the line and use it in a sentence. 书
我有很多中文书.
行动吧！LET’S GO! Answer the following questions with your partner or group. 1. What subjects does Center A provide?
英语，日语
2. What subjects does Center B provide?
英语
19
Review Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 1 to Lesson 4
复习 Review Lesson 1 to Lesson 4
I. Conversation Review Practice the following dialogues with a partner. 1. A: 你好！请问，您贵姓？ B: 我姓 ____。你呢？ A: 我姓 _____。请问，你是哪国人？ B: 我是 ______。你呢？你是中国人吗？ A: 不是。我是 ______。 2. A: 请问，你叫什么名字？ B: 我的英文名字是 _________，中文名字是 ________。你呢？ A: 我的英文名字是 _________，中文名字是 ________。 请问你会说中文吗？ B: 我会说______。我也会说一点儿 ______。你会说什么语言？ A: 我会说 ______。 3. A: 请问，你的中文老师是谁？ B: 我的中文老师是 ____ 老师。 A: 中文课的功课多吗？ B: ___________。你呢？你学什么？功课多吗？ A: 我学 __________。功课 ________。 4. A: 这是一本什么书？ B: 这是一本 ______。那本呢？那是什么书？是谁的书？ A: 那是一本 ______。那是_________的书。
III. Comprehensive Review With a partner or group, discuss the following clues and use the chart below to figure out what the nationalities and majors are for 小美, 于英, and 文中. Clues: 1. 小美不会说中文，也不会说法文。 2. 于英和文中都不是美国人。 3. 文中不会说英文。 4. 这是文中的中文功课。 5. 小美不学文学。 6. 于英不是法国人。
20
Review Answer (Simplified Version) 美 国 人
中 国 人
法 国 人
Lesson 1 to Lesson 4 中 文
工 程
英 国 文 学
小美 于英 文中
With your partner or group, complete the following sentences with the information above. Then check your answers with the class. 小美是美国人，学工程。 于英是中国人，学英国文学/工程。 文中是法国人，学中文。
21
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 4 Studies
第四课 学习 Lesson 4 Studies I. Listening Exercises 4-1
Listen to the short passage and then choose the best answer for each of the following questions. 你们好！我的中文名字叫美英，我是英国人，我学英国文学，英国文学很难，功课也很多。这是我 的书，这是一本英国文学书。我的英国文学老师是美国人，他会说一点儿中文。这是我的同学，她 叫小文。她学工程。小文是中国人，她有很多中国文学书。 1. What does Meiying study? a. Engineering b. English literature c. Chinese language 2. What does Meiying say about her teacher? a. He is an American. He can speak some Chinese. b. He is from Britain. He can speak some Chinese. c. He is from China. He can speak English. 3. Does Meiying find studying literature very difficult? a. No, not difficult at all. b. Yes, but only a little. c. Yes, very difficult. 4. Where is Xiaowen from? a. She is from the U.S. b. She is from China. c. She is from Britain. 5. What books does Xiaowen have? a. Books on Chinese literature. b. Books on English literature. c. Books on English language.
4-2
Listen and complete the dialogues. Dialogue 1 A: 这是什么？ B: 这是我的工程书。 A: 工程难吗？ B: 很难。 Dialogue 2 A: 那是谁？ B: 那是小美的文学老师。. A: 他好吗？ B: 他很好。
22
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 4 Studies
Dialogue 3 A: 你学什么？ B: 我学中文。 A: 中文难吗？ B: 不太难，可是功课很多。 1. A: Zhè shì shénme? B: Zhè shì wǒde gōngchéng shū. A: Gōngchéng nán ma? B: Hěn nán.
2. A: Nà shì shéi? B: Nà shì Xiǎoměi de wénxué lǎoshī. A: Tā hǎo ma? B: Tā hěn hǎo.
3. A: Nǐ xué shénme? B: Wǒ xué Zhōngwén. A: Zhōngwén nán ma? B: Bú tài nán, kěshì gōngkè hěn duō.
4-3
Listen to the challenge dialogue. Though there may be some words and phrases that are unfamiliar to you, see if you can understand the general meaning by using what you have learned. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false.
4-4
老师：
大家好。现在我们上课。这是你们第三课考试的考卷。我改好了，现在发给你们看看。
老师：
你们都看到自己的成绩了，怎么样？中文难吗？第三课的考试难吗？小美，你觉得呢？
吴小美：
我觉得中文不难，第三课的考试也不太难。可是中文功课很多。
老师：
那，文中，你呢？你觉得怎么样？
李文中：
我也觉得中文功课很多，考试也很难。
老师：
是吗？那，你们都学什么？难吗？功课多吗？
李文中：
我学英国文学。英国文学很难，功课也不少。
吴小美：
我学工程。工程不太难，可是功课很多。
1. Xiaomei thinks the Lesson 3 test is difficult.
True
False
2. Wenzhong thinks the Chinese homework is not too much.
True
False
3. Xiaomei studies Engineering and she thinks it is very hard.
True
False
Listen to the challenge dialogue again and choose the best answer for each of the following questions. 1. What is Wenzhong’s major? a. Chinese literature
b. English literature
2. What does Wenzhong think about the Chinese test? a. He thinks it is difficult. b. He thinks it is very easy. c. He thinks it is easy but there is too much homework.
23
c. Engineering
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 4 Studies
3. Which statement below is NOT true about Xiaomei. a. Xiaomei’s major is English literature. b. Xiaomei’s major is Engineering. c. Xiaomei thinks the Lesson 3 test is not too difficult.
II. Character Exercises 4-5
4-6
Match each Pinyin phrase with its Chinese characters. e
1. shénme shū
a. 你学什么
a
2. nǐ xué shénme
b. 功课很多
d
3. gōngchéng nán ma
c. 这本呢
b
4. gōngkè hěnduō
d. 工程难吗
c
5. zhè běn ne
e. 什么书
Write as many characters as you can that use the following radicals. 1. 人/亻
他 们 什
2. 言
说 谁 请
3. 工
工 功
III. Grammar Exercises 4-7
Unscramble the following sentences by placing the characters in the correct order. 1. 文学 /我 /英国 /学 我学英国文学。 2. 也 /我们 /功课 /的 /不少 我们的功课也不少。 3. 一 /书 /本 /中文 /这是 这是一本中文书。 4. 工程 / 不 /也 / 难 /太 工程也不太难。 5. 文学 /吗 /英国 /你 /学 你学英国文学吗？ 6. 是 /本 /书 /什么 /那 /一 那是一本什么书？
4-8
Write as many questions as you can for the following sentences. Example:
这是中文书。
这是什么？ 这是什么书？ 1. 这是文中的一本工程书。 这是谁的工程书？ 这是文中的什么？ 这是文中的什么书？ 这是文中的工程书吗？ 这是不是文中的工程书？
24
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 4 Studies
2. 工程课的功课很多。 什么功课很多？ 工程课的什么很多？ 工程课的功课怎么样？ 工程课的功课很多吗？ 工程课的功课多不多？ 3. 英国文学不太难。 什么不太难？ 哪国文学不太难？ 英国什么不太难？ 英国文学怎么样？ 英国文学难吗？ 英国文学难不难？ 4. 中文功课很多，也很难。 什么功课很多，也很难？ 中文什么很多，也很难？ 什么很多，也很难？ 中文功课怎么样？ 中文功课多吗？难吗？ 中文功课多不多？难不难？
IV. Comprehensive Exercises 4-9
Translate the following sentences into Chinese. 1. He is my Chinese literature professor. 他是我的中国文学老师。 2. Is that an engineering book? 那是一本工程书吗？ 3. French literature is not very difficult, but there is a lot of homework. 法国文学不太难，可是功课很多。
25
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
第五课
Lesson 5 Introductions
介绍
Lesson 5 Introductions 补充课文
SUPPLEMENTARY PRACTICE
Choose the correct answer for the following questions about the passage.
1. 美美是哪国人？ a. 法国人
b. 美国人
c. 中国人
b. 两个
c. 她没有室友
d. 英国人
2. 她有几个室友？ a. 一个 3. 她们都会说 _______。 a. 英文和法文
b. 法文和中文
c. 英文和一点儿中文
d. 中文和一点儿英文
I. Listening Exercises 5-1
Listen and choose the Pinyin with the correct tone for each word you hear. Then check your answers with a partner or the class.
5-2
1. shíyóu
shìyǒu
2. liǎngge
liànggé
3. jiéshào
jièshào
4. zhè shí
zhè shì
5. dǒushì
dōushì
6. pēngyou
péngyou
Listen and complete each word with the Pinyin you hear. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. jièshào
2. péngyou
3. chánglái
4. xuéwèn
5. zhèxiē
6. yǔfǎ
7. qiúzhēn
8. liǎngjié
II. Character Exercises 5-4
5-5
Match each Chinese word with its English meaning. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. d
1. 介绍
a. roommate
c
2. 几
b. to have
a
3. 室友
c. how many
f
4. 来
d. to introduce
e
5. 朋友
e. friend
b
6. 有
f. to come
Write the correct character or Pinyin on the lines below. The first one is done as an example. Notice how the phrases vary and build to the final sentence as you check your answers with a partner. 1. 这 zhè 2. 这 是 zhè shì
26
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 5 Introductions
3. 这 是 我 朋 友 zhè shì wǒ péng you 4. 这 是 我 的 中 国 朋 友 zhè shì wǒ de Zhōng guó péng you 5. 这 是 我 们 的 中 国 朋 友 王 红。 zhè shì wǒ men de Zhōng guó péng you Wáng Hóng.
III. Grammar Exercises 5-8
With a partner, change the sentences to include the words in parentheses. 1. 丁文是小美的室友。方中也是小美的室友。(有) 小美有两个室友。 2. 红美会说中文。小文也会说中文。(们，都) 她们都会说中文。 3. 这是我的室友大红，她也学英文。(介绍) 我来介绍一下我的室友大红。 4. 大中是我朋友。小美是我朋友。(和，都) 大中和小美都是我朋友。
文化点滴
CULTURE NOTES
Do you know …
•
what two general forms of address are in Chinese? Key: “先生” means Mister. “小姐” means Miss, which is used for young female only.
•
when you should use a person’s professional title? Key: In a business meeting.
•
how to address a person who is much older than you? Key: If you know the senior person well, the surname followed by “伯父/叔叔” or “伯母/阿姨” is well accepted. If you are not familiar with the senior person, a simple address of “伯伯” or “阿姨” is safe.
•
If 您 should be used between friends? Key: No. It will cause a hint of distance, irony, or sneering .
趣味中文
FUN WITH CHINESE
Work in small groups or with your class. 2. Which four characters in the saying have you learned so far? Write them on the lines and use them in a sentence. 有, 朋, 来, 不
27
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
第五课
Lesson 5 Introductions
介绍
Lesson 5 Introductions
I. Listening Exercises 5-1
5-2
5-3
Listen to the dialogue. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. 方明：
嘿，小红，她是你的朋友吗？
小红：
嘿，方明，来，我来介绍一下。这是我的室友美文，这是我的朋友方明。
方明：
你好，美文。
美文：
你好，方明。你是中国人吗？
方明：
是，我是中国人。你呢？
美文：
我不是中国人。我是美国人。我学中文。
小红：
美文常跟我说中文。
1. Xiǎohóng de shìyǒu jiào Měiwén.
True
False
2. Měiwén hé Fāng Míng dōu shì Zhōngguórén.
True
False
3. Fāng Míng jièshào tāde péngyou Xiǎohóng.
True
False
4. Měiwén cháng gēn Xiǎohóng shuō Zhōngwén.
True
False
5. Xiǎohóng méiyǒu Měiguó shìyǒu.
True
False
Listen to the dialogue and write the Pinyin for the words you hear. 吴小英：
大文，我来 (1) 介绍一下。这 (2) 是我室友王小红。
李大文：
(3) 我叫李大文，你好！
王小红：
你好！你是学生 (4) 吗？
李大文：
是。我 (5) 学工程。你 (6) 呢 ？
王小红：
我学 (7) 文学。我 (8) 和小英 (9) 是同学。我们 (10) 都学 (11) 中国文学。
Listen to the challenge dialogue. Though there may be some words and phrases that are unfamiliar to you, see if you can understand the general meaning by using what you have learned. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. 吴小美：
文中，来！我来介绍一下。这是我室友：王红和小英。
李文中：
你们好！我是文中，小美的中文课同学。
王红：
文中，你好！请问你也住在宿舍吗？有室友吗？
李文中：
是，我也住在宿舍，我有两个室友。
小英：
他们是谁？他们都是哪国人？
李文中：
他们是丁明和方小文。他们都是中国人。我常跟他们说中文。
王红：
小英和我也都是中国人。我们也常跟小美说中文。
吴小美：
嘿，蛋糕切好了，好像很好吃，咱们去吃蛋糕吧!
1. Wang Hong is Xiaomei’s roommate.
True
False
2. Wenzhong doesn’t have roommates.
True
False
3. Wenzhong often speaks Chinese with Xiaoying.
True
False
28
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
5-4
Lesson 5 Introductions
Listen to the challenge dialogue again and choose the best answer for the following questions. 1. Who are Wenzhong’s roommates? a. Wang Hong and Xiaomei. b. Dingming and Fang Xiaowen. c. Xiaoying and Fang Xiaowen. 2. What are Wang Hong and Xiaoying’s nationalities? a. They are both Korean. b. Wang Hong is Chinese. Xiaoying is American. c. They are both Chinese. 3. Which statement below is NOT true? a. Xiaomei has two Chinese roommates. b. Wenzhong has two Chinese roommates. c. Xiaomei is studying Chinese but Wenzhong is not.
II. Character Exercises 5-5
5-6
Choose the correct traditional form for each of the following characters. a. 書 b. 來 1. 来 2. 绍
a. 給
b. 麼
c. 紹
3. 几
a. 幾
b. 兒
c. 個
4. 两
a. 這
b. 兩
c. 國
5. 个
a. 兒
b. 來
c. 個
6. 这
a. 對
b. 這
c. 會
Write the Chinese characters for the following phrases. 1. liǎngge péngyou 两个朋友 2. jǐge shìyǒu 几个室友 3. jièshào yíxià 介绍一下 4. cháng shuō Zhōngwén 常说中文
III. Grammar Exercises 5-7
c. 幾
Unscramble the following sentences by placing the characters in the correct order. 1. 没
/我
/室友
/有
我没有室友。 2. 也
/我们
/常
/都
/中文
/说
我们也都常说中文。 3. 两
/他们
/有
/中国 /个
/室友
他们有两个中国室友。 4. 都
/老师
/也
/说
/学生
/中文
/和
老师也都和学生说中文。 5. 几
/室友
/有
/你
/个
你有几个室友？ 6. 常
/我
/跟
/说 /英文
/我室友
我室友常跟我说英文。
29
SAM Answer (Simplified Version) 5-8
Lesson 5 Introductions
Complete the following paragraph. 方美文(1) 是 中文班的学生。她(2) 有 一个室友(3) 叫 王文英。 王文英(4) 是 中国人。她(5) 有
一个男朋友，(6) 叫 李中。
李中是美国(7) 人 ，他(8) 也 学中文。他常(9) 跟 文英说中文。 他们(10) 都 是好朋友。 5-9
Read the paragraph above. Write as many questions about the information as you can. (Try to write at least four questions.) 1. 方美文是什么班的学生？ 2. 谁有一个室友？ 3. 她叫什么名字？ 4. 王文英是哪国人？ 5. 她有一个什么？ 6. 她的男朋友叫什么？ 7. 谁是美国人？ 8. 李中也学什么？ 9. 她常常跟文英做什么？ 10. 他们都是好朋友吗？
30
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 6 Family
第六课 家 Lesson 6 Family 补充词
SUPPLEMENTARY VOCABULARY
亲属称谓 [Qīnshǔ chēngwèi]
Addressing One’s Relatives
Relatives on the father’s side grandparents
uncles
aunts
Relatives on the mother’s side
爷爷 [yéye]
奶奶 [nǎinai]
外公 [wàigōng]
外婆 [wàipó]
祖父 [zǔfù]
祖母 [zǔmǔ]
外祖父
外祖母
grandfather
grandmother
[wàizǔfù]
[wàizǔmǔ]
老爷 [lǎoye]
姥姥 [lǎolao]
maternal
maternal
grandfather
grandmother
伯伯 [bóbo]
伯母 [bómǔ]
舅舅 [jiùjiu]
舅妈 [jiùmā]
father’s elder
wife of father’s
mother’s
wife of mother’s
brother
elder brother
brother
brother
叔叔 [shūshu]
婶婶 [shěnshen]
father’s younger
wife of father’s
brother
younger brother
姑姑 [gūgu]
姑父 [gūfù]
阿姨 [āyí]
姨父 [yífù]
姑妈 [gūmā]
姑丈 [gūzhàng]
姨妈 [yímā]
姨丈 [yízhàng]
father’s sister
husband of
mother’s sister
husband of
father’s sister cousins#
nephews nieces
Note:
mother’s sister
堂哥
堂嫂
表哥
表嫂
[tánggē]
[tángsǎo]
[biǎogē]
[biǎosǎo]
堂姐
堂姐夫
表姐
表姐夫
[tángjiě]
[tángjiěfu]
[biǎojiě]
[biǎojiěfu]
堂弟
堂弟妹
表弟
表弟妹
[tángdì]
[tángdìmèi]
[biǎodì]
[biǎodìmèi]
堂妹
堂妹夫
表妹
表妹夫
[tángmèi]
[tángmèifu]
[biǎomèi]
[biǎomèifu]
侄子 [zhízi]
外甥 [wàisheng]
brother’s son
sister’s son
侄女 [zhínü]
外甥女
brother’s
[wàishengnü]
daughter
sister’s daughter
Children of your father’s brothers are 堂 [táng] cousins
#
New word: 嫂 [sǎo] sister-in-law.
31
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 6 Family
职业 [Zhíyè] OCCUPATIONS SIMPLIFIED
TRADITIONAL
PINYIN
1.
会计师
會計師
kuàijìshī
N.
accountant
2.
经纪人
經紀人
jīngjìrén
N.
agent
3.
建筑师
建築師
jiànzhùshī
N.
architect
4.
老板
老闆
lǎobǎn
N.
boss
5.
商人
商人
shāngrén
N.
businessman
6.
大学生
大學生
dàxuéshēng
N.
college student
7.
顾问
顧問
gùwèn
N.
consultant
8.
医生
醫生
yīshēng
N.
doctor
9.
经济师
經濟師
jīngjìshī
N.
economist
10.
厨师
廚師
chúshī
N.
chef
11.
工程师
工程師
gōngchéngshī
N.
engineer
12.
官员
官員
guānyuán
N.
government official
13.
家庭主妇
家庭主婦
jiātíng zhǔfù
N.
housewife
14.
留学生
留學生
liúxuéshēng
N.
international students
15.
律师
律師
lǜshī
N.
lawyer
16.
邮递员
郵遞員
yóudìyuán
N.
mailman
(邮差)
(郵差)
(yóuchāi)
N.
17.
经理
經理
jīnglǐ
N.
manager
18.
护士
護士
hùshi
N.
nurse
19.
飞行员
飛行員
fēixíngyuán
20.
程序员
程式師
chéngxùyuán
(程序设计师)
(程式設計師)
(chéngshì shèjìshī)
21.
教授
教授
jiàoshòu
N.
professor
22.
房地产顾问
房地產顧問
fángdìchǎn gùwèn
N.
real estate agent
23.
秘书
秘書
mìshū
N.
secretary
24.
推销员
推銷員
tuīxiāoyuán
N.
salesman
25.
职员
職員
zhíyuán
N.
staff
26.
老师
老師
lǎoshī
N.
teacher
27.
导游
導遊
dǎoyóu
N.
tourist guide
1. 学文 met 书友’s mom, dad, and older sister.
True
False
2. 学文 has a dog.
True
False
3. 书友’s sister’s boyfriend loves cars.
True
False
4. 学文’s mom is a homemaker.
True
False
5. 学文 and 书友 are classmates.
True
False
补充课文
pilot N.
computer programmer
SUPPLEMENTARY PRACTICE
Read the following statements and choose whether they are true or false.
32
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 6 Family
I. Listening Exercises 6-1
Listen and choose whether the first word (in bold) changes to a 2nd tone or a half 3rd tone when combined with the word following it. The first one is done as an example.
6-2
1. wǒ jiā
2nd tone
half 3rd tone
6. Fǎguó
2nd tone
half 3rd tone
2. Niǔyuē
2nd tone
half 3rd tone
7. Měiguó
2nd tone
half 3rd tone
3. lǎoshī
2nd tone
half 3rd tone
8. nǎ guó
2nd tone
half 3rd tone
4. hěnduō
2nd tone
half 3rd tone
9. hěnhǎo
2nd tone
half 3rd tone
5. nǐ lái
2nd tone
half 3rd tone
10. qǐngwèn
2nd tone
half 3rd tone
Listen and choose whether the first word (in bold) is pronounced with a 2nd tone or 4th tone when combined with the second word. The first one is done as an example.
6-3
1. yidìng
2nd tone
4th tone
5. yidiǎr
2nd tone
4th tone
2. yixiàr
2nd tone
4th tone
6. bu duì
2nd tone
4th tone
3. bu shuō
2nd tone
4th tone
7. bucuò
2nd tone
4th tone
4. buhǎo
2nd tone
4th tone
Listen to the passage. You will hear the following sentences among other sentences. Use Pinyin to complete the sentences you hear. Check your answers with a partner or the class. Wǒ jiào Chéng Jiāyǒu. Wǒ shì cóng Běijīng lái de. Wǒ jiā yǒu sìge rén: bàba, māma, jiějie hé wǒ. Wǒ bàba hé māma dōu shì gōngchéngshī. Tāmen dōu zài Běijīng gōngzuò. Tāmen hěn máng. Jiějie shì dàxuéshēng. Tā yǒu yíge nánpéngyou. Wǒ méiyǒu nánpéngyou. Wǒ yǒu yìzhī gǒu hé yìzhī māo. Wǒ hěn ài wǒde jiā. 1. Wǒ shì cóng Běijīng lái de. 2. Wǒ jiā yǒu sìge rén. 3. Wǒ bàba hé māma dōu shì gōngchéngshī. 4. Wǒ jiějie yǒu nánpéngyou, wǒ méiyǒu. 5. Wǒ hěn ài wǒde jiā.
II. Character Exercises 6-5
Write the correct character or Pinyin on the lines below.The first one is done as an example. Notice how the phrases vary and build to the final sentence as you check your answers with a partner. 1. 家 jiā 2. 我 的 家 wǒ de jiā 3. 我 爱 我 的 家。 wǒ ài wǒ de jiā. 4. 我 很 爱 我 的 家。 wǒ hěn ài wǒ de jiā. 5. 姐 姐 也 很 爱 我 们 的 家。 jiě jie yě hěn ài wǒ men de jiā. 6. 我 们 大 家 都 很 爱 我 们 的 家。 wǒ men dà jiā dōu hěn ài wǒ men de jiā.
33
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version) 6-6
Lesson 6 Family
Match each beginning character with an ending character to make words. The first one is done as an example. c
1. 爸
a. 师
h
2. 妈
b. 家
e
3. 姐
c. 爸
b
4. 大
d. 狗
f
5. 工
e. 姐
g
6. 一辆
f. 作
d
7. 一只
g. 车
a
8. 工程
h. 妈
文化点滴
CULTURE NOTES
Do you know … •
who is considered the head of the family in traditional Chinese families? Key: The man of the senior generation.
•
what was considered the most important of all qualities for Chinese families? Key: The respect and care of elders in the family (filial piety).
•
what a major challenge is for modern Chinese family values? Key: To enjoy the freedom while keeping good old traditions.
趣味中文
FUN WITH CHINESE
1. Which character in the idiom did you learn in this lesson? Write it on the line and use it in a sentence. 爱
我很爱我的家。
34
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 6 Family
第六课 家 Lesson 6 Family I. Listening Exercises 6-1
Listen to five statements. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. 1. 家明和友朋都是台湾人。 2. 友朋的爸爸是工程师，他很忙。 3. 家明有男朋友。她姐姐没有。 4. 友朋的家在波士顿，不在纽约。 5. 家明的妹妹有两只猫，没有狗。
6-2
1. Jiāmíng hé Yǒupéng dōushì cóng Táiwān lái de.
True
False
2. Yǒupéng de bàba bù máng.
True
False
3. Jiāmíng méiyǒu nánpéngyou, tā jiějie yǒu.
True
False
4. Yǒupéng de jiā búzài Niǔyuē, zài Bōshìdùn.
True
False
5. Jiāmíng de mèimei méiyǒu māo, yǒu liǎngzhī gǒu.
True
False
Listen to the passage and questions. Then write the answers in Pinyin. 我叫王家友。我是一个美国人。我学中文。我家在加州洛杉矶。我家有五个人：爸爸、妈妈、哥哥、 妹妹和我。爸爸是工程师，很忙。妈妈是大学老师，也很忙。哥哥和我都是大学生。他有一个女朋 友。我没有。妹妹也是学生。她有一只狗。我很爱我的家。 Wǒ jiào Wáng Jiāyǒu. Wǒ shì yíge Měiguórén. Wǒ xué Zhōngwén. Wǒ jiā zài Jiāzhōu Luòshānjī. Wǒ jiā yǒu wǔge rén: bàba, māma, gēge, mèimei hé wǒ. Bàba shì gōngchéngshī, hěn máng. Māma shì dàxué lǎoshī, yě hěn máng. Gēge hé wǒ dōu shì dàxuéshēng. Tā yǒu yíge nǚpéngyǒu. Wǒ méiyǒu. Mèimei yě shì xuésheng. Tā yǒu yìzhī gǒu. Wǒ hěn ài wǒde jiā. 1. 请问，他叫什么名字？ Qǐngwèn, tā jiào shénme míngzi?
Tā jiào Wáng Jiāyǒu.
2. 他家在哪儿？ Tā jiā zài nǎr?
Tā jiā zài Jiāzhōu Luòshānjī.
3. 他爸爸、妈妈是做什么工作的？ Tā bàba, māma shì zuò shénme gōngzuò de?
Gōngchéngshī, dàxué lǎoshī.
4. 他哥哥有没有女朋友？ Tā gēge yǒuméiyou nǚpéngyou?
Yǒu yíge nǚpéngyou.
5. 他妹妹有什么？ Tā mèimei yǒu shénme? 6-3
Yǒu yìzhī gǒu.
Listen to the challenge dialogue. Though there may be some words and phrases that are unfamiliar to you, see if you can understand the general meaning by using what you have learned. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. Mike:
嗨，Jenny!
Jenny: 嗨，Mike!
35
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
6-4
Lesson 6 Family
Andy:
嗨，Mike，那是谁？好漂亮！她是哪国人？
Mike:
那是 Jenny。我的朋友。她是法国人。
Andy:
嗨，她是你女朋友吗？
Mike:
不是啦。她哥哥是我的好朋友，他们俩都是这儿的学生。
1. Jenny is Mike’s girlfriend.
True
False
2. Jenny’s brother is also a student here.
True
False
Listen to the challenge dialogue again and choose the best answer for each of the following questions. 1. Where does Jenny come from? a. China
b. Britain
c. U.S.
d. France
2. Jenny’s brother and Mike are a. good friends
b. roommates
c. classmates
II. Character Exercises 6-5
6-6
Write as many characters as you can that use the following radicals. 1. 女
妈 姐
2. 人/亻
们 作 他 你
3. 车
辆
Write the Chinese characters for the following sentences. 1. Wǒ jiā yǒu sìge rén.
我家有四个人。
2. Jiějie yǒu yíge nánpéngyou.
姐姐有一个男朋友。
3. Bàba, māma dōu shì zài Měiguó gōngzuò de.
爸爸，妈妈都是在美国工作的。
4. Wǒ yǒu liǎngzhī gǒu.
我有两只狗。
5. Wǒ hěn ài wǒde jiā.
我很爱我的家。
III. Grammar Exercises 6-7
Write the correct measure words. 1. 一辆车 2.
6-8
一只狗
3. 两个学生 4. 三本书
Read the following passage. Then use 是......的 to answer the questions below. 小美的家在纽约。小美学英国文学，她也会说一点儿中文，她是在中国学中文的。她家有四个人： 爸爸、妈妈、姐姐和她。爸爸、妈妈都是从北京来的，他们都在纽约工作。爸爸有两辆车，都是日 本车。姐姐的男朋友叫家文，他是从英国来的。 1. 小美是学什么的？ 小美是学英国文学的。 2. 小美的爸爸、妈妈都是从哪儿来的？ 小美的爸爸、妈妈都是从北京来的。 3. 小美是在哪儿学中文的？ 小美是在中国学中文的。 4. 姐姐的男朋友是从哪儿来的？ 姐姐的男朋友是从英国来的。
36
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 6 Family
IV. Comprehensive Exercises 6-9
Translate the following sentences into Chinese. 1. Both Xiaoying and her boyfriend are from China. 小英和她的男朋友都是从中国来的。 2. My roommate has an American car. 我的室友有一辆美国车。 3. There are four people in my family. We all love our families. 我家有四个人。我们都爱我们的家。
37
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 7 Addresses
第七课 地址 Lesson 7 Addresses 补充课文
SUPPLEMENTARY PRACTICE
Choose the correct answer for the following questions about the passage.
1. 他的宿舍是几号？ a. 43 b. 431 2. 房间大吗？ a. 很大 b. 多大 3. 他有几个室友？ a. 两个 b. 三个
c. 4-3
d. 413
c. 不大
d. 不小
c. 没有室友
d. 五个
I. Listening Exercises 7-1
Listen and choose the Pinyin with the correct tone for each word you hear. Then check your answers with a partner or the class.
7-2
1. xùshè
sùshè
2. duōshǎo
dōushǎo
3. diànhuà
diànhuā
4. hǎomā
hàomǎ
5. shǒujī
shǎojī
6. qiàowāi
xiàowài
Listen and complete each sentence with the correct Pinyin. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. Nǐ zhùzài nǎr? (住在) 2. Nǐde fángjiān dà ma? (房间) 3. Wǒ méiyǒu diànhuà. (没有) 4. Nǐde diànhuà hàomǎ shì duōshǎo? (号码) (多少)
II. Character Exercises 7-4
Add the following numbers. Check your answers with a partner by asking “X 加 [jiā] Y 是多少？” (X plus Y is how much?) and answering “X 加 Y 是…” (X plus Y is…). 1. 三 + 五 = 八 2. 一 + 六 = 七 3. 七 + 二 = 九 4. 四 + 一 = 五 5. 三 + 一 + 二 = 六 6. 二 + 八 = 十
7-5
Match each Chinese character with its English meaning. Then check your answers with a partner. e
1. 小
a. big
d
2. 难
b. many
a
3. 大
c. small
e
4. 容易
d. difficult
f
5. 少
e. easy
b
6. 多
f. few
38
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 7 Addresses
III. Grammar Exercises 7-6
Write the correct character or Pinyin on the lines below. The first one is done as an example. Notice how the phrases vary and build to the final sentence as you check your answers with a partner. 1. 住 zhù 2. 住 在 zhù zài 3. 朋 友 住 在 宿 舍 péng you zhù zài sù shè 4. 姐 姐 的 朋 友 住 在 宿 舍 jiě jie de péng you zhù zài sù shè 5. 姐 姐 的 朋 友 不 住 在 宿 舍。她 住 校 外。 Jiě jie de péng you bú zhù zài sù shè. Tā zhù xiào wài.
7-9
Work with a partner. Take turns asking questions that elicit the given answers. 1. 你住在哪儿？
我住在宿舍。
2. 你住在多少号？
我住在三五六号。
3. 你的房间大吗？
我的房间不大。
4. 你的功课多吗？
我的功课很多。
5. 你的哥哥有手机吗？
我哥哥有手机。
6. 你的手机号码是多少？
我的手机号码是(一五五)二六七三九四八。
7. 他有几个妹妹？
他有两个妹妹。
8. 老师也是中国人吗？
老师也是中国人。
文化点滴
CULTURE NOTES
Do you know …
•
why China chose August 8, 2008 8:08 P.M. as the opening date and time for the 2008 Olympics? Key: The long string of 8s is considered lucky because in the Southern dialects, 八 [bā] sounds similar to the word 发 [fā], which means “to make a fortune and become prosperous”.
•
why some hospitals do not have a fourth floor? Key: 4 (四) [sì] is a taboo number that Chinese people avoid.
•
why a man might send his girlfriend 99 roses? Key: 九 sounds exactly the same as 久 [jiǔ] (long lasting).
行动吧！LET’S GO! 2. You are in Beijing now and you have two letters to mail. You want to mail letter (A) to an address in Beijing and letter (B) to an address in Shanghai. Which letter(s) would you put in the following slots? 本埠：letter (A) 外埠：letter (B)
39
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 7 Addresses
第七课 地址 Lesson 7 Addresses I. Listening Exercises 7-1
Listen to the dialogue. Then choose the best answer for each of the following questions. A: 小美，你住在哪儿？ B: 我住在公寓。 A: 多少号？ B: 五二三号。 A: 你的公寓有没有电话？ B: 有，号码是五三三
六八六二四九七。
A: 你有几个室友？ B: 我有一个室友。 1. 小美住在哪儿？ a. 住在宿舍。
a. 三三二
二六八七四六九
b. 住在校外。
b. 七七二
二二八四七六九
c. 住在朋友家。
c. 五三三
六八六二四九七
d. 住在公寓。
d. 八八二
九二八四六七三
2. 小美的房间号码是多少？
7-2
3. 公寓的电话号码是多少？
4. 小美有几个室友？
a. 二三五
a. 四个
b. 五二三
b. 两个
c. 九二三
c. 三个
d. 二八五
d. 一个
Listen and complete the dialogue in Pinyin. 常小西：书文，你住在那个 (1) gōngyù 吗？(公寓) 程书文：不，我住在 (2) sùshè，房间号码是 (3) sān èr liù hào。(宿舍) (三二六号) 常小西：你的 (4) sùshè 有 (5) diànhuà 吗？(宿舍) (电话) 程书文：没有 (6) diànhuà，可是我有 (7) shǒujī。(电话) (手机) 常小西：号码是 (8) duōshǎo？(多少) 程书文：号码是 (9) yī liù èr sān èr wǔ wǔ bā jiǔ sì。(一六二
7-3
三二五五八九四)
Listen to the challenge dialogue. Though there may be some words and phrases that are unfamiliar to you, see if you can understand the general meaning by using what you have learned. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. A: 您好！我想寄这个到北京。 B: 寄 UPS 到中国你得写上你的住址。请问你住哪儿？ A: 我住贝尔街 154 号。 B: 贝尔街 154 号。 B: 请问你的电话号码是多少？ A: 425-234-0056。 B: 425-234-0056。好了，没问题。
40
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
7-4
Lesson 7 Addresses
1. His home’s street address number is 154.
True
False
2. His phone number is 452-234-0065.
True
False
Listen to the challenge dialogue again and choose the best answer for each of the following questions. 1. What is the context of the dialogue? a. Someone introducing their friend in a coffee shop. b. Two students running into their teacher in a grocery store. c. Someone giving an address in a post office. d. A waitress taking an order in a restaurant. 2. Which country is mentioned in the conversation? a. U.S.
b. France
c. Canada
d. China
II. Character Exercises 7-5
7-6
Match each Pinyin phrase with its Chinese characters. d
1. duōshǎo hào
a. 电话号码
a
2. diànhuà hàomǎ
b. 你住在哪儿
b
3. Nǐ zhùzài nǎr
c. 我住校外
e
4. méiyǒu shǒujī
d. 多少号
c
5. Wǒ zhù xiàowài
e. 没有手机
Write the traditional forms of the following words. 1. 哪儿 哪兒
3. 房间 房間
2. 号码 號碼
4. 电话 電話
5. 手机 手機
III. Grammar Exercises 7-7
Unscramble the following sentences by placing the characters in the correct order. 1. 的
/你
/吗
/房间
/大
你的房间大吗？ 2. 也
/我们
/校外 /都 /住
/在
我们也都住在校外。 3. 的
/他们
/有
/没有 /电话 /宿舍
他们的宿舍有没有电话？ 4. 都
/老师
/住
/宿舍 /学生 /在
/和
老师和学生都住在宿舍。 5. 电话
/是
/多少 /你的 /号码
你的电话号码是多少？ 6. 吗
/手机
/有
/你
你有手机吗？ 7-8
大王 and 小李 are classmates who are exchanging contact information. Complete their conversation. 大王：小李，你 (1) 住 在宿舍吗？ 小李：对了，我 (2) 住 在学校的(3) 宿舍 。你(4) 也 住在学校的宿舍吗？ 大王：不，我住在校外，在(5) 八九七六四号 第五大街。(Number 89764) 小李：你的房间(6) 大 吗？
41
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 7 Addresses
大王：很大，(7) 也 很好。你住在(8) 多少号 ？ 小李：二○八号。我的房间(9) 也 不小。你的电话号码(10) 是多少 ？ 大王：(11) 一○三九五二八四六七。(103-952-8467) 小李：我的电话号码(12) 是 一○三 六四八二五三一。 7-9
Translate the following sentences into Chinese. 1. Where do you live? 你住在哪儿？ 2. Do you live on campus? 你住在校内吗？ 3. My brother’s dorm is not big. 我哥哥的宿舍不大。 4. Is your cell phone number (142)268-5738? 你的手机号码是（一四二）二六八 五七三八吗？
42
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 8 Meeting and Making Plans
第八课 见面、相约 Lesson 8 Meeting and Making Plans 补充课文
SUPPLEMENTARY PRACTICE
Read the following statements and choose whether they are true or false. 1. 学友是美国人。
True
False
2. 学友会说法语和中文。
True
False
3. 他们常常一起上课。
True
False
4. 他们常常一起去吃饭。
True
False
5. 今天他们想去吃中国菜。
True
False
I. Listening Exercises 8-1
8-2
Listen and choose the word you hear. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. rènxi
rènshi
2. shàngkè
sàngkè
3. xiākè
xiàkè
4. yǐhuò
yǐhòu
5. yíqǐ
yìqǐ
6. qīfàn
chīfàn
7. jīntiān
jiāntiān
8. sàcì
xiàcì
9. zhàizhàn
zàijiàn
Listen and complete each word with the Pinyin you hear. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. qù (去)
2. xiāng (想)
3. shàng (上)
4. xià (下)
5. shèr (事儿)
6. chī (吃)
7. cài (菜)
8. xíng (行)
9. jīn (今)
10. zěn (怎)
11. rì (日)
12. jiàn (见)
II. Character Exercises 8-4
Write the correct character or Pinyin on the lines below. The first one is done as an example. Notice how the phrases vary and build to the final sentence as you check your answers with a partner. 1. 一 起 yì qǐ 2. 一 起 吃 饭 yì qǐ chī fàn 3. 一 起 吃 韩 国 菜 yì qǐ chī Hán guó cài 4. 跟 朋 友 一 起 去 吃 韩 国 菜 gēn péng you yì qǐ qù chī Hán guó cài 5. 我 今 天 跟 朋 友 一 起 去 吃 日 本 菜。 Wǒ jīn tiān gēn péng you yì qǐ qù chī Rì běn cài.
8-5
Write the Chinese characters for the following words. Then check your answers with a partner. 1. to know
认识
2. to go
去
3. to attend class
上课
4. after
以后
5. to want
想
6. to have a meal
吃饭
7. to return
回
8. cuisine
菜
9. goodbye
再见
10. today
今天
11. how
怎么样
12. next time
下次
43
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 8 Meeting and Making Plans
III. Grammar Exercises 8-8
With a partner, take turns forming questions to elicit the given responses. Be sure to use all three question forms: A 不 A questions, tag questions, and questions with 吗. 1. 下课以后我有事儿。 下课以后你有没有事儿？ 下课以后你有事儿吗？ 下课以后你有事儿，是吗？ 2. 我今天想吃日本菜。 你今天想不想吃日本菜？ 你今天想吃日本菜吗？ 你今天想吃日本菜，对吗？ 3. 我跟小文一起上文学课。 你跟不跟小文一起上文学课？ 你跟小文一起上文学课？ 你跟小文一起上文学课，是不是？ 4. 我爸爸是工程师。 你爸爸是不是工程师？ 你爸爸是工程师吗？ 你爸爸是工程师，对不对？ 5. 我学法文。 你学不学法文？ 你学法文吗？ 你学法文，对吗？ 6. 我的功课很多。 你的功课多不多？ 你的功课多吗？ 你的功课很多，是不是？
文化点滴
CULTURE NOTES
Do you know … •
what information is usually printed on a business card in China? Key: Previous positions, roles of value, awards, and even advertisement for the company.
•
how to exchange business cards politely in China? Key: One should present and receive the cards with both hands to show respect and sincerity.
•
what “guanxi” is and why it is good to have? Key: “Guanxi” is a concept of developing a relationship, whether in business or in friendship. It is important in networking as people often introduce those they have a good relationship with.
44
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 8 Meeting and Making Plans
行动吧！LET’S GO! With a partner or in small groups, answer the following.
1. Where does 美美 work and what is her title? 韩国花园酒店
饭馆经理
2. What are her phone and cell phone numbers? 电话﹕021-32168688
手机﹕13935356969
3. What other forms of contact information are on her business card? 地址
传真
传呼
电邮
45
Review Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 5 to Lesson 8
复习 Review Lesson 5 to Lesson 8 III. Comprehensive Review With a partner or group, discuss the following clues and use the chart below to figure out who lives where and with whom, and what they will do after class today. Clues: 1. 小文有一个姐姐和一个弟弟。小文和弟弟都跟两个人一起住。 2. 中国人会说小文的房间号码不太好。 3. 小文和姐姐都不住在家。 4. 住在家的人是跟爸爸妈妈一起住的。爸爸妈妈住在六十八号。 5. 住三○九号的人不学日文。 6. 下课以后，住宿舍的人上日文课。住校外的人会跟朋友去吃饭。 7. 弟弟下课以后会回家休息。 住 校 外
住 在 家
宿 舍
跟 一 个 朋 友
跟 爸 爸 妈 妈
跟 两 个 室 友
六 十 八 号
三 ○ 九 号
二 四 四 号
吃 饭
回 家 休 息
上 日 文 课
姐姐
小文
弟弟
With your partner or group, answer the following questions, using the information above. Then check your answers with the class. 1. 弟弟住在哪儿？
Answer: 弟弟住在家，在 68 号。
他跟谁一起住？
Answer: 弟弟跟爸爸妈妈一起住。
下课以后，他会不会回家？
Answer: 下课以后，他会回家。
2. 姐姐学不学日文？
Answer: 姐姐不学日文。
下课以后她会去吃饭。 她不住在宿舍/家。她是住校外的。 3. 小文有三个室友，对不对？
Answer: 不对，有两个。
小文住几号？
Answer: 小文住 244 号。
小文忙不忙？下课以后会去哪儿？
Answer: 小文很忙，下课以后去上日文课。
46
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 8 Meeting and Making Plans
第八课 见面、相约 Lesson 8 Meeting and Making Plans I. Listening Exercises 8-1
Listen to the questions and read the following answers. Then choose the best answers for the questions. 1. 那是你的中文书，对吗？ 2. 你是从法国来的，是不是？ 3. 你的功课多不多？ 4. 你朋友的家大不大？ 1. a. 对。那是我的中文书。 b. 不对，那是我的中文书。 c. 对。那是我的英文书。 2. a. 是，我是从韩国来的。 b. 不是，我是从法国来的。 c. 不是，我是从韩国来的。 3. a. 我室友的功课很多。 b. 很多。 c. 我今天没有事儿。 4. a. 他不在家。 b. 我的家很大。 c. 他的家不大。
8-2
Listen to the dialogue. Then choose the best answer for each of the following questions. 文中：小美，你是不是从纽约来的？ 小美：对了。有什么事吗？ 文中：我有一个同学叫德朋，也是从纽约来的，你认识不认识他？ 小美：我认识他，他是我室友王红的男朋友。 文中：德朋、王红和我想下课以后一起去吃韩国菜，你去不去？ 小美：我很想去，可是我今天功课很多，我下次和你们一起吃饭，好吗？ 文中：好。下次我们一起吃中国菜，怎么样？ 小美：行，再见。 文中：再见。 1. 德朋是从哪儿来的？ a. 中国
b. 韩国
c. 纽约
d. 日本
c. 泰国菜
d. 日本菜
c. 泰国菜
d. 日本菜
2. 文中、德朋和王红今天想去吃什么菜？ a. 中国菜
b. 韩国菜
3. 他们下次想去吃什么菜？ a. 中国菜
b. 韩国菜
47
SAM Answer (Simplified Version) 8-3
Lesson 8 Meeting and Making Plans
Listen to the challenge dialogue. Though there may be some words and phrases that are unfamiliar to you, see if you can understand the general meaning by using what you have learned. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. A: 晚上有事儿吗？ B: 没什么事儿。你呢？晚上有事儿吗？ A: 我也没事儿。怎么，想出去吃饭啊？ B: 不是，我不想出去吃饭。那晚上你想不想去看电影？ A: 好啊。怎么去？ B: 你认识不认识我的室友张永军？他有车。我们找他一起去，他可以开车。 A: 张永军？不认识。没关系，你的朋友就是我的朋友。 B: 那好，晚上七点来我的宿舍。 A: 行。
8-4
1. They will invite another person to join them tonight.
True
False
2. They will meet at the restaurant.
True
False
Listen to the challenge dialogue again and choose the best answer for each of the following questions. 1. What are they talking about? a. Their teachers
c. Their homework
b. Going out together
d. Their apartment
2. Who knows Zhang Yongjun? a. Both of them know him. b. One knows him, but the other doesn’t know him yet. c. Neither of them knows him. d. Neither of them knows him but they are going to meet him soon.
II. Character Exercises 8-5
8-6
Write the traditional forms of the following characters. 1. 认 認
3. 课 課
5. 饭 飯
2. 识 識
4. 后 後
6. 样 樣
Write the Chinese characters for the following sentences. 1. Nǐ yǒu shénme shèr ma? 你有什么事儿吗？ 2. Nǐ xiǎngbuxiǎng huí jiā? 你想不想回家？ 3. Wǒmen yìqǐ qù Zhōngguó, hǎobuhǎo? 我们一起去中国，好不好？ 4. Xiàkè yǐhòu wǒ xiǎng qù péngyou jiā. 下课以后我想去朋友家。 5. Wǒ bú rènshi nà ge gōngchéngshī. 我不认识那个工程师。
48
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 8 Meeting and Making Plans
III. Grammar Exercises 8-7
8-8
Match each question with the response that best answers the question. b
1. 你认识不认识他？
a. 我想吃韩国菜。
a
2. 你想不想吃韩国菜？
b. 我不认识他。
d
3. 我们下次吃日本菜，怎么样？
c. 我没有事儿。
c
4. 下课以后你有事儿吗？
d. 行，很好。
Change the following sentences into questions using the words or patterns in parentheses. 1. 吴小美是学工程的。（是吗） Ans.: 吴小美是学工程的，是吗？ 2. 她今天想回家。（A 不 A） Ans.: 她今天想不想回家？ 3. 张友朋认识我姐姐。（对不对） Ans.: 张友朋认识我姐姐，对不对？ 4. 他的两个室友都是美国人。（吗） Ans.: 他的两个室友都是美国人吗？ 5. 我们下次一起去纽约。（怎么样） Ans.: 我们下次一起去纽约，怎么样？ 6. 下课以后我去吃饭。（A 不 A） Ans.: 下课以后你去不去吃饭？
IV. Comprehensive Exercises 8-9
Translate the following sentences into Chinese. 1. Where are you going? 你去哪儿？ 2. I have plans after class. 我下课以后有事儿。 3. Do you want to have dinner with us tonight? 今天晚上你想和我们一起吃饭吗？ 4. My friend doesn’t know our English teacher. 我的朋友不认识我们的英文老师。
49
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 9 Phone Calls
第九课 打电话 Lesson 9 Phone Calls 补充词
SUPPLEMENTARY VOCABULARY
SIMPLIFIED
TRADITIONAL
PINYIN
网络
網路
wǎngluò
(网络)
(網路)
(wǎnglù)
网吧
網吧
wǎngbā
(网咖)
(網咖)
(wǎngkā)
3.
网站
網站
4.
网页
5.
1.
N.
Internet
N.
Internet cafe
wǎngzhàn
N.
Web site
網頁
wǎngyè
N.
Web page
聊天室
聊天室
liáotiānshì
N.
chat room
6.
电脑游戏
電腦遊戲
diànnǎo yóuxì
N.
computer game
7.
在线游戏
線上遊戲
zàixiàn yóuxì
N.
online game
(在线游戏)
(線上遊戲)
(xiànshàng yóuxì)
8.
病毒
病毒
bìngdú
N.
virus
9.
软件
軟體
ruǎnjiàn
N.
software
(软件)
(軟體)
(ruǎntǐ)
硬件
硬體
yìngjiàn
V.O.
hardware
(硬件)
(硬體)
(yìngtǐ)
发短信
發短信
fā duǎnxìn
V.O.
to send a short (cell phone)
(送简讯)
(送簡訊)
(sòng jiǎnxùn)
通
通
tōng
2.
10. 11. 12.
message M.W.
(measure word for telephone calls)
补充课文
SUPPLEMENTARY PRACTICE
Answer the following questions about the passage. 1. Did Xiao Xie answer the phone today? Key: 今天他给小谢打电话的时候，他不在。 2. Who answered the phone? Key: 他室友接了电话。 3. What did the roommate say about Xiao Xie? Key: 他室友说他正在上课。 4. When Xiao Xie called back, what was the speaker doing? Key: 他正在看电视。 5. What did the speaker ask Xiao Xie? Key: 他问小谢 “你在忙吗？” “你正在做什么呢？” 6. What was Xiao Xie doing when he called the speaker back? Key: 小谢正在上网。
50
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 9 Phone Calls
I. Listening Exercises 9-1
Listen and choose whether the Pinyin is correct (对 [duì]) or incorrect (不对 [búduì]). If it is incorrect, write the correct Pinyin on the line. Then check your answers with a partner or the class.
9-2
1. shíhuò
对
不对 shíhou
2. fángjiān
对
不对 _____
3. zhīdòu
对
不对 zhīdào
4. diānhuà
对
不对 diànhuà
5. diānsì
对
不对 diànshì
6. shàngwáng
对
不对 shàngwǎng
7. wǎngshàng
对
不对 wǎnshang
8. liúyán
对
不对 _____
Listen and complete each word with the correct Pinyin. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. děng (等)
2. xiè (谢)
3. wèi (位)
4. wǎng (网)
5. duì (对)
6. diàn (电)
7. kàn (看)
8. wǎn (晚)
9. huà (话)
10. yào (要)
11. zuò (做)
12. máng (忙)
II. Character Exercises 9-4
Write the correct character or Pinyin on the lines below. The first one is done as an example. Notice how the phrases vary and build to the final sentence as you check your answers with a partner. 1. 正 在 zhèng zài 2. 正 在 上 课 zhèng zài shàng kè 3. 正 在 看 电 视 zhèng zài kàn diàn shì 4. 正 在 打 电 话 zhèng zài dǎ diàn huà 5. 正 在 打 电 话 给 朋 友 zhèng zài dǎ diàn huà gěi péng you 6. 我 哥 哥 正 在 给 朋 友 打 电 话。 wǒ gē ge zhèng zài gěi péng you dǎ diàn huà.
9-5
Match each Chinese phrase with its English meaning. Then check your answers with a partner or class. c.
1. 打电话
a.
return a phone call
e.
2. 看电视
b.
leave a message
d.
3. 回来
c.
make a phone call
f.
4. 接电话
d.
return
b.
5. 留言
e.
watch TV
a.
6. 回电
f.
answer the phone
III. Grammar Exercises 9-8
With a partner, use the words in parentheses to complete the sentences in the progressive form. Then change the sentences into their negative forms. The first one is done as an example. 1. 我 在 忙。(忙)
我 没 有 在 忙。
Wǒ zài máng.
Wǒ méiyǒu zài máng.
51
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
9-9
Lesson 9 Phone Calls
2. 他正在上课。(上课)
他没有/没/不在上课。
3. 她正在吃饭。(吃饭)
她没有/没/不在吃饭。
4. 文中正在介绍朋友。(介绍)
文中没有/没/不在介绍朋友。
5. 小美正在说中文。(说)
小美没有/没/不在说中文。
6. 于英正在做功课。(做)
于英没有/没/不在做功课。
With a partner, describe what the people are doing in the following pictures. 1. 正在打电话
2. 正在上网
3. 正在看书
4. 正在做功课
5. 正在上课
6. 正在吃饭
文化点滴
CULTURE NOTES
Do you know … •
if people in China have Blackberry phones and iPhones? Key: Yes.
•
how people type text messages in Chinese? Key: In addition to input methods based on the Chinese phonetic alphabet (Romanized Pinyin in mainland China and 注音符号 in Taiwan), there is a unique “Numerical Five Strokes” input method which is particularly convenient for cell phones. In this method, five numerical keys representing the main writing strokes are used to construct most Chinese characters.
•
what a QQ number is? Key: QQ is a Chinese version of IM, similar to MSN or Yahoo Instant Messenger. QQ users’ account IDs are usually a series of numbers.
趣味中文
FUN WITH CHINESE
2. Which character in 说来话长 did you learn in this lesson? Write it on the line and use it in a sentence. 话
他正在打电话。 我会说中国话。 你的电话号码是多少？
3. Take a closer look at these three characters: 说, 话, and 语. What do the characters have in common with each other? What do you think this common feature means? Pinyin
English
Chinese phrases
说
shuō
to speak
说中文
话
huà
word, language
对话
语
yǔ
language
汉语
行动吧！LET’S GO! Answer the following questions with your partner or group. 1. Where are 小文 and 美美 now? What are they doing there? 他们在中大网吧。他们正在玩在线游戏。
52
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 9 Phone Calls
2. What is the purpose of their email message? 请小英明天一起去吃韩国菜。小文给小英他的手机号码，请小英给他回电。 3. What do they ask 小英 to do? 明天他们要去吃韩国菜，他们问小英去不去。
53
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 9 Phone Calls
第九课 打电话 Lesson 9 Phone Calls I. Listening Exercises 9-1
Listen to the dialogue. Then choose the best answer for each of the following questions. 丁明：喂。请问小美在吗？ 小美：我就是，请问您是哪位？ 丁明：我是丁明。 小美：是你啊，丁明，你在哪儿呢？ 丁明：我在我朋友文中的家呢。我们正在看电视呢。 小美：我有一本中文书，名字叫《家》。你想不想看？ 丁明：太好了。我想今天晚上看，行吗？ 小美：行。我今天晚上给你书。再见。 丁明：再见。 1. 丁明在哪儿？ a. 在纽约 b. 在他的房间 c. 在朋友家 d. 在宿舍 2. 丁明在做什么？ a. 在看电视 b. 在上网 c. 在上课 d. 在吃日本菜 3. 今天晚上丁明想做什么？ a. 想看电影 b. 想去朋友家 c. 想看中文书 d. 想上网 4. 和丁明打电话的是谁？ a. 爱文 b. 小美 c. 丁明的妹妹 d. 王红
9-2
Listen to the passage. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. 喂，小西。我是和你一起上中文课的方书程。你晚上有事儿吗？我想今天晚上和你一起练习中文。 请你回来以后给我打电话吧。我的电话号码是（一四二）三六六 七八九二。谢谢。再见。 1. 电话是小西的同学打来的。
True
False
2. 打电话的人今天晚上想和小西一起去吃饭。
True
False
3. 他的电话号码是(一四二)三六六七八九二。
True
False
54
SAM Answer (Simplified Version) 9-3
Lesson 9 Phone Calls
Listen to the challenge dialogue. Though there may be some words and phrases that are unfamiliar to you, see if you can understand the general meaning by using what you have learned. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. A: 喂！你好。 B: 喂，你好！请问李老师在吗？ A: 老师？我们这儿没有老师。 B: 噢！你那儿是不是北京大学英语系？ A: 不是，这儿不是北京大学英语系，这是我家里的电话。 B: 噢！你的电话是 65617084 吗？ A: 不是，这个电话是 65610784。 B: 噢！对不起，对不起，我打错了。 A: 没关系。
9-4
1. He called a wrong number.
True
False
2. He was looking for his brother.
True
False
Listen to the challenge dialogue again and choose the best answer for each of the following questions. 1. What is the relationship between the two people? a. teacher and student
b. friends
c. classmates
d. strangers
2. What is her phone number? a. 65617085
b. 65618074
c. 65714078
d. 65610784
II. Character Exercises 9-5
9-6
9-7
Choose the Pinyin that correctly shows the pronunciation of the following characters. 1. 正在
zèngzài
zhèngzài
zèngzhài
2. 房间
hángjiān
féngjiàn
fángjiān
3. 电视
diànsì
diànshì
diánshì
4. 上网
shángwǎng
shàngwǎng
shánghuǎng
5. 时候
shíhou
shéhou
chíhou
6. 今天
zīntiān
jíntian
jīntiān
7. 晚上
wǎngsàng
wánchàng
wǎnshang
8. 留言
lúyán
niúyán
liúyán
9. 再见
zàijiàn
zhàijiàn
zhuáizhuàn
10. 知道
jīdào
jīdòu
zhīdào
Write the common radical for each of the following sets of characters. 1. 今 做 位 候
人 亻
2. 叫 呢 吗 吃
口
3. 忙 怎 想
心忄
4. 字 学
子
5. 家 宿 室
宀
Write the traditional forms of the following words and phrases. 1. 打电话
打電話
5. 对不起
對不起
2. 看电视
看電視
6. 时候
時候
55
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 9 Phone Calls
3. 上网
上網
7. 谢谢
謝謝
4. 看书
看書
8. 给
給
III. Grammar Exercises 9-8
Complete the following dialogue using “正在......” and the phrases in parentheses. A: 请问小文在吗？ B: 在，他(1)正在看电视呢。（看电视） A: 丁老师呢？ B: 她(2)正在休息呢。（休息） A: 姐姐呢？ B: 她(3)正在和男朋友打电话呢。（和男朋友打电话） A: 王红和小美都在学中文吗？ B: 王红没有在学中文。她(4)正在学法文呢。（学法文）
9-9
Unscramble the following sentences by placing the characters in the correct order. 1. 正在
/我
/呢
/室友
/电视 /看
我室友正在看电视呢。 2. 就是
/请问
/哪位
/是 /我 /您
请问您是哪位？我就是。 3. 不在
/他们
/都 /他们 /正在
/上课
他们都不在。他们正在上课。 4. 什么
/老师
/回来
/时候
/请问
请问老师什么时候回来。 5. 上网
/室友
/没有
/在 /他
他室友没有在上网。 6. 回来
/给
/请他 /打电话
/以后
/我
回来以后请他给我打电话。
IV. Comprehensive Exercises 9-10
Translate the following sentences into Chinese. 1. Would you like to leave a message? 你要不要留言？ 2. Please ask him to call me when he returns. 请他回来以后给我打电话。 3. May I ask who is speaking, please? 请问你是哪位？ 4. He’s not watching TV. He’s surfing the Internet. 他没有在看电视。他在上网呢。 5. Hold on, please. 请等一下儿。
56
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 10 Time and Schedules
第十课 时间表 Lesson 10 Time and Schedules 补充词
SUPPLEMENTARY VOCABULARY
SIMPLIFIED
TRADITIONAL
PINYIN
1.
刷牙
刷牙
shuāyá
V.O.
to brush your teeth
2.
洗脸
洗臉
xǐliǎn
V.O.
to wash your face
3.
洗澡
洗澡
xǐzǎo
V.O.
to take a bath
补充课文
SUPPLEMENTARY PRACTICE
Read the following statements and choose whether they are true or false. 1. 这个学期欢欢不太忙。
True
False
2. 这个学期欢欢有五门课。
True
False
3. 这个学期正生也有五门课。
True
False
4. 下午下课以后，正生常去打球。
True
False
5. 正生每天看他的电子邮件。
True
False
I. Listening Exercises 10-1
Listen and write the Pinyin for the words you hear. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. 打球
2. 学期
3. 每天
4. 起床
5. 睡觉
6. 喜欢
7. 然后
8. 电子邮件
II. Character Exercises 10-3
Write the correct character or Pinyin on the lines below. The first one is done as an example. Notice how the phrases vary and build to the final sentence as you check your answers with a partner. 1. 两 点 liǎng diǎn 2. 今 天 两 点 Jīn tiān liǎng diǎn 3. 今 天 两 点 半 Jīn tiān liǎng diǎn bàn 4. 今 天 两 点 半 我 有 课 Jīn tiān liǎng diǎn bàn wǒ yǒu kè 5. 每 天 三 点 半 我 有 两 门 课。 měi tiān sān diǎn bàn wǒ yǒu liǎng mén kè.
10-4
Write characters to express the time shown on each clock. Then check your answers with a partner by taking turns asking and answering what time it is on each clock. 1.
3:00 P.M. 三点
2.
4:10 P.M..
3.
四点十分
5:15 A.M. 五点一刻
57
4.
12:02 P.M. 十二点零二分
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version) 5.
6:30 A.M.
6.
六点半
Lesson 10 Time and Schedules
9:45 P.M.
7.
九点三刻
10:20 A.M.
8.
十点二十分
III. Grammar Exercises 10-7
With a partner, complete the following with 就, 才, or 然后. 1. 我常常在下午三点一刻去图书馆看书，然后四点回宿舍。 2. 小明这个学期很忙。他考试以后才给哥哥写信。 3. 文中每天很早就起床。可是他今天十点才起床，然后十点半去学校。 4. 今天我有事儿，一点半才吃午饭。
文化点滴
CULTURE NOTES
Do you know … •
if male and female students usually live in the same dorm building? Key: No. If students live on campus, female and male students have separate buildings.
•
if it is common for Chinese college students to have part-time jobs? Key: Yes. In recent years, it has become common for students to have part-time jobs.
•
if there is anything like a campus newspaper on Chinese university campuses? Key: Yes. They are called 校园文学 and 校园歌曲.
行动吧！LET’S GO! Answer the following questions with your partner or group. 1. 每天早上什么时候有新闻？ 7:00-9:00 A.M. 2. 介绍中国菜的节目是几月几号？ 12/13, 12/14 3. 你哥哥喜欢体育，有体育新闻吗？每天都有吗？ 有，周一、三、五有 4. 朋友说三国演义电视剧很好。每天都有吗？什么时候？ 周一到周五都有，20:00-21:00
58
1:59 P.M. 差一分两点
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 10 Time and Schedules
第十课 时间表 Lesson 10 Time and Schedules I. Listening Exercises 10-1
Listen to 小美’s daily schedule for her summer Chinese course in Shanghai, and then choose whether the following statements are true or false. 我是小美。我正在上海学中文。 我每天都很忙。 每天早上七点半就起床，然后九点到学校上中文课。 下课以后，我常常去图书馆看书。 每天下午我都和我的中国朋友们一起说中文，然后一起打球。 我很喜欢我在上海的大学生活。
10-2
1. 小美每天早上八点起床。
True
False
2. 然后九点去学校上课。
True
False
3. 下课以后，小美常去图书馆看书。
True
False
4. 下午小美上中文课。
True
False
5. 中文课以后，小美去吃饭。
True
False
Listen to 友朋 talk about his daily schedule and write the time of each activity in Chinese. 我每天早上八点就起床，九点半去学校上课。 我每天下午两点二十分上中文课。 下课以后，我四点一刻去打球。 我六点半吃晚饭。然后七点去图书馆看书。 我喜欢上网，每天晚上十一点上网。 我十二点半睡觉。 1. 起床
3. 去学校
八点
九点半
七点
2. 睡觉
4. 吃晚饭
6. 打球
十二点半 10-3
5. 去图书馆
六点半
四点一刻
7. 上中文课 两点二十分 8. 上网 十一点
Listen to the challenge dialogue. Though there may be some words and phrases that are unfamiliar to you, see if you can understand the general meaning by using what you have learned. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. A: 现在几点了？ B: 九点半了，快起床吧。 A: 我们今天几点有课？ B: 十点半。 A: 噢！那我再睡十分钟吧。 B: 不可以，起来吧。不早了。我们今天要早一点儿出门。 A: 好吧。对了，下课以后，你能和我一起去图书馆吗？ B: 不行，下课以后，我有事儿，我得去工程课老师那儿交作业。
59
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
10-4
Lesson 10 Time and Schedules
1. They will go to class together this morning.
True
False
2. They will go to the library together after class.
True
False
Listen to the challenge dialogue again and choose the best answer for the following questions. 1. What is the time now? a. 8:30
b. 9:00
c. 9:15
d. 9:30
2. When will their class begin today? a. 9:30
b. 10:30
c. 10:45
d. 11:15
II. Character Exercises 10-5
10-6
Match the Pinyin with the corresponding Chinese characters. d
1. jǐdiǎn qǐchuáng
a. 写电子邮件
e
2. shí’èrdiǎn bàn shuìjiào
b. 九点一刻
a
3. xiě diànzǐ yóujiàn
c. 几月几号
b
4. jiǔdiǎn yí kè
d. 几点起床
c
5. jǐ yuè jǐ hào
e. 十二点半睡觉
Write the Chinese characters for the following words and phrases. 1. university
dàxué
大学
5. email
diànzǐyóujiàn
电子邮件
2. semester
xuéqī
学期
6. library
túshūguǎn
图书馆
3. every day
měitiān
每天
7. to like
xǐhuān
喜欢
4. life
shēnghuó
生活
8. to write a letter
xiěxìn
写信
III. Grammar Exercises 10-7
Match each Chinese sentence with its meaning. b
1. 他昨天八点才吃晚饭。
a. He was very busy yesterday and got up at six o’clock.
c
b. He didn’t eat dinner until eight o’clock
2. 他常常晚上三点以后才睡觉。
yesterday. e
c. He often doesn’t go to bed until after
3. 他今天很忙，两点才吃午饭。
three o’clock. a
d. He is not busy. He often doesn’t get up
4. 他昨天很忙，六点就起床。
until eleven o’clock. d
e. He is very busy today and didn’t eat
5. 他不忙，他常早上十一点才起床。
lunch until two o’clock. 10-8
Unscramble the following sentences by placing the characters in the correct order. 1. 十点
/我
/二十 /下课 /分
我十点二十分下课。 2. 打球
/去
/以后 /下课 /我 /喜欢
我喜欢下课以后去打球。 3. 邮件
/地址
/电子
/我的
/这是
这是我的电子邮件地址。
60
SAM Answer (Simplified Version) 4. 我
/室友
Lesson 10 Time and Schedules
/生活 /这是 /大学
/的
这是我室友的大学生活。 5. 睡觉
/起床
/几点
/每天
/他
/几点
他每天几点起床几点睡觉?
IV. Comprehensive Exercises 10-9
Translate the following sentences into Chinese. 1. He went to have Japanese food at 12:30. After that, he went to the library. 他十二点半去吃日本菜，然后去图书馆。 2. After getting up, I wrote a letter to my older sister. 我起床以后给我姐姐写信。 3. He plays ball at 9:00 P.M. every day. 他每天晚上九点打球。 4. I like my university life. 我喜欢我的大学生活。
61
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 11 Ordering Food
第十一课 点菜 Lesson 11 Ordering Food 补充词
SUPPLEMENTARY VOCABULARY SIMPLIFIED
TRADITIONAL
PINYIN
1.
餐馆
餐館
fānguǎn
N.
restaurant
2.
饭店
飯店
fàndiàn
N.
restaurant, hotel
3.
橙汁
橙汁
chéngzhī
N.
orange juice
4.
橘子汁
橘子汁
júzizhī
N.
tangerine juice
(柳橙汁)
(柳橙汁)
(liǔchéngzhī)
结账
結帳
jiézhàng
V.O.
to settle the account
(结账)
(結帳)
6.
酸
酸
suān
Adj.
sour
7.
甜
甜
tián
Adj.
sweet
8.
苦
苦
kǔ
Adj.
bitter
9.
辣
辣
là
Adj.
spicy
10.
咸
鹹
xián
Adj.
salty
11.
清淡
清淡
qīngdàn
Adj.
plain
12.
烫
燙
tàng
Adj.
burning hot
13.
凉
涼
liáng
Adj.
cool
5.
常见食品 [Chángjiàn shípǐn] COMMON FOODS SIMPLIFIED
TRADITIONAL
PINYIN
1.
馄饨
餛飩
húntun
N.
wonton
2.
春卷
春捲
chūnjuǎn
N.
spring roll
3.
鱼
魚
yú
N.
fish
4.
虾
蝦
xiā
N.
shrimp
常见水果 [Chángjiàn shuǐguǒ]
COMMON FRUITS
SIMPLIFIED
TRADITIONAL
PINYIN
1.
苹果
蘋果
píngguǒ
N.
apple
2.
香蕉
香蕉
xiāngjiāo
N.
banana
3.
桃子
桃子
táozi
N.
peach
4.
梨子
梨子
lízi
N.
pear
5.
西瓜
西瓜
xīguā
N.
watermelon
6.
草莓
草莓
cǎoméi
N.
strawberry
7.
葡萄
葡萄
pútao
N.
grape
62
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version) 补充课文
Lesson 11 Ordering Food
SUPPLEMENTARY PRACTICE
Choose the correct answer for the following questions about the passage. 1. Where do they go to eat every Friday? a. 日本饭馆
b. 韩国饭馆
c. 法国饭馆
d. 中国饭馆
c. 冰红茶
d. 水
2. What beverage does the author order? a. 绿茶
b. 可乐
3. Which of the following does the waitress always ask if they would like to eat? a. 面还是饭
b. 炒面还是饺子
c. 饺子还是炒饭
d. 汤还是饭
c. 三碗汤
d. 一盘炒饭
c. 打电话给朋友
d. 回家
4. Which one do they not order? a. 三十个饺子
b. 一盘炒面
5. What do they do after they eat? a. 去上课
b. 回图书馆
I. Listening Exercises 11-1
Listen and choose whether the Pinyin is correct (对 [duì]) or incorrect (不对 [búduì]). If it is incorrect, write the correct Pinyin on the line. Then check your answers with a partner or the class.
11-2
1. fānguǎn
对
不对 fànguǎn
2. lùchá
对
不对 lǜchá
3. kēchá
对
不对 hēchá
4. fúwùyuán
对
不对 _____
5. jīwéi
对
不对 jǐwèi
6. jiǎozǐ
对
不对 jiǎozi
7. bīnhóngchā
对
不对 bīnghóngchá
8. chǎofàn
对
不对 _____
Listen and complete each word with the correct Pinyin. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. háishì
2. diǎncài
3. liǎngbēichá
4. sānwǎnfàn
5. xiǎojiě
6. yǐnliào
7. yìshuāngkuàizi
8. sìwǎntāng
9. kāfēi
10. báifàn
11. càidān
12. chǎomiàn
II. Character Exercises 11-4
Write the correct character or Pinyin on the lines below.The first one is done as an example. Notice how the phrases vary and build to the final sentence as you check your answers with a partner. 1. 想 xiǎng 2. 想 吃 饭 xiǎng chī fàn 3. 想 吃 炒 饭 xiǎng chī chǎo fàn 4. 他 想 吃 一 盘 炒 饭 tā xiǎng chī yì pán chǎo fàn 5. 他 想 吃 一 盘 还 是 两 盘 炒 饭？ tā xiǎng chī yì pán hái shì liǎng pán chǎo fàn?
63
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
11-5
Lesson 11 Ordering Food
Match each Chinese word with its English meaning. Then check your answers with a partner and practice saying the words. d. 1. 一瓶可乐
a.
a pair of chopsticks
b.
one dumpling
c.
a plate of fried noodles
d.
a bottle of cola
e.
a bowl of soup
f.
a cup of green tea
yìpíng kělè 2. 一盘炒面
c.
yìpán chǎomiàn 3. 一杯绿茶
f.
yìbēi lǜchá 4. 一双筷子
a.
yìshuāng kuàizi b. 5. 一个饺子 yíge jiǎozi 6. 一碗汤
e.
yìwǎn tāng
III. Grammar Exercises 11-8
With a partner, complete the sentences below, using words from the box. Some words may be used more than once. 跟
想
要
还是
1. 你喜欢吃饭还是吃面？ 2. 请跟我来。 3. 你想喝什么？ 4. 我要二十个饺子。 5. 李文中常跟丁明说中文。 6. 吃晚饭以后，你想上网还是看电视？ 11-9
With a partner, change the simple statements below into questions about choice, with 还是 and the words in parentheses. Then take turns asking and answening the questions. 1. 他每天做功课。（在图书馆/在宿舍） 他每天在图书馆还是在宿舍做功课？ 2. 杨欢要回家。（六点半/七点） 杨欢要在六点半还是在七点回家？ 3. 李先生是老师。（日文/中文） 李先生是日文还是中文老师？ 4. 她要一杯茶。（红/绿） 她要一杯红茶还是绿茶？
文化点滴
CULTURE NOTES
Do you know … •
what three things are emphasized in Chinese cooking? Key: Chinese cooking emphasis on color (色), flavor (香), and taste (味).
64
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version) •
Lesson 11 Ordering Food
what some different styles of Chinese cuisine are? Key: There are eight styles of Chinese cuisine. For example, Sichuan 川菜 [Chuāncài] and Hunan 湘菜 [Xiāngcài] styles are hot and spicy, whereas the Yangzhou 淮阳菜 [Huáiyángcài] and Zhejiang 浙菜 [Zhècài] styles are a sweet and light in flavor with fresh, tender ingredients. The characteristics of the Cantonese style 粤菜 [Yuècài] are very special and unique ingredients, consisting mostly of fresh seafood with an emphasis on the “original flavor” or natural qualities of foods.
•
what some health remedies of Chinese cooking are? Key: Chinese food commonly uses a lot of ingredients with purported healing properties, such as ginger, green onion, garlic, cinnamon, yam, eggs, vinegar, mung beans, and rice wine. Some healing through food, or 食疗 [shíliáo] examples: Sea cucumbers to strengthen bones, bitter melon to clear the blood, carp to improve the gallbladder and spleen, and pig’s feet or chicken broth to help blood circulation.
趣味中文
FUN WITH CHINESE
Work in small groups or with your class. 2. Which characters in the saying have you learned in prior lessons? Practice using them in a sentence. 饭 后
活
九
十
行动吧！LET’S GO! Discuss the following with a partner or in small groups. 3. 酸辣粉 [suānlàfěn] and 麻辣烫 [málàtàng] are both spicy dishes. The word for spicy can be found in their names. Which character do you think means “spicy”? 辣
65
Review Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 9 to Lesson 11
复习 Review (Lesson 9 to lesson 11)
II. Writing and Character Review 3. When you went to invite your friend 小明 out to eat, he wasn’t in his dorm room. Complete the following note to leave for him. (Write one character on each line). 小明﹕ 你好﹐我是 ___________________ (your name)。我来找你的时候 (When I came to see you)，你不在 (you were not in)。你室友在，他正在看电视呢 (he was watching TV)。他说你正在学校上网 (on the Internet)。 我问他你什么时候回来 (when you would be back)，他说今天晚上 (tonight)。 你想不想跟我一起去吃饭 (Do you want to go out to eat)？我们去吃中国菜，好不好 (Let’s go eat Chinese food, how does that sound)？请你回来的时候，给我打电话 (Please call me when you return)。 你有我的电话号码吗 (Do you know my cell phone number)？号码是二六八九七五三 (268-9753)。 再见 (Thank you) ！ _________________ (Your name) 十一月五日 (Nov. 5) 十一点二十七分 (11:27)
III. Comprehensive Review There has been a mix up at a busy restaurant! Some messages for phone orders and reservations have been torn into two parts. Work in groups to read the clues and match the parts of the messages below. The first one is done as an example. When you have matched the parts, role-play customers calling the busy restaurant to place the orders on the messages. Clues: 1. 三二五号的人有很多功课。他们要喝咖啡。a 2. 今天晚上，小谢跟他女朋友会来。 d 3. 三月五号，很多人会来。 b 4. 要吃炒饭的人也要吃牛肉。 f 5. 在宿舍的人要吃炒面和蛋糕。 e 6. 一一二号爱吃青菜。 c
66
Review Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 9 to Lesson 11
1. 325号要点:
a.
两杯咖啡
325 hào yào diǎn:
liǎngbēi kāfēi
一盘炒面
两瓶可乐
yìpán chǎomiàn
liǎngpíng kělè
十五个饺子 shíwǔ ge jiǎozi 三碗汤 sānwǎn tāng b. 王小姐有十五位
2. (reservation)
Wáng xiǎojiě yǒu shíwǔ wèi
今天，七点 jīntiān, qīdiǎn
3. (reservation)
c.
五盘青菜
三月五号，十二点半
wǔpán qīngcài
Sānyuè wǔhào, shí’èrdiǎn bàn
两碗白饭 liǎngwǎn báifàn 三个色拉 sānge shālā
4. 92号要点: 炒饭
d. 两位要来
92 hào yào diǎn: chǎofàn
liǎngwèi yào lái
5. 在宿舍，863号要点:
e.
zài sùshè, 863 hào yào diǎn:
两盘炒面 liǎngpán chǎomiàn 两碗汤 liǎngwǎn tāng 一个蛋糕 yíge dàngāo
6. 112号要点:
f.
112 hào yào diǎn:
牛肉 niúròu 青菜 qīngcài 三杯茶 sānbēi chá
67
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 11 Ordering Food
第十一课 点菜 Lesson 11 Ordering Food I. Listening Exercises 11-1
11-2
Listen to the dialogue. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. 小华:
美英，你介绍的这盘炒面太好吃了！
美英:
对，很多人都喜欢吃这家饭馆的炒面。
小华:
美英，你的汤怎么样？好喝吗？
美英:
很好喝。
小华:
对了，你还想喝点儿什么，可乐还是红茶？
美英:
我不喜欢喝可乐。我要一杯红茶。
1. 他们正在饭馆吃饭。
True
False
2. 美英正在喝汤。
True
False
3. 饭馆的炒面不太好吃。
True
False
4. 美英不喜欢喝可乐。
True
False
Listen to the telephone conversation between 方小文 and a waitress at a Chinese restaurant. Choose the cost of each item that 方小文 ordered for pick-up. 服务员：
喂，你好！这是北京饭馆。
方小文：
你好！我想点中国菜，40 分钟以后去拿。
服务员：
好，你想点什么菜？
方小文：
我要四盘炒饭、两盘炒面和三十个饺子。
服务员：
你要汤吗？
方小文：
要。我要五碗汤、两瓶水，三瓶可乐，还要一杯冰红茶。
服务员：
好。谢谢。
方小文：
不客气。再见。
服务员：
再见。
方小文点的菜：
11-3
水
1
2
3
4
5
可乐
1
2
3
4
5
冰红茶
1
2
3
4
5
汤
1
2
3
4
5
炒饭
1
2
3
4
5
炒面
1
2
3
4
5
饺子
10
20
30
40
50
Listen to the challenge dialogue. Though there may be some words and phrases that are unfamiliar to you, see if you can understand the general meaning by using what you have learned. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. A: 您好！美味中餐馆。 B: 你好，我想点几个菜。一会儿我去拿。
68
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 11 Ordering Food
A: 请问您想点什么？ B: 一盘炒面，一碗酸辣汤。 A: 好的，还有吗？ B: 有可乐吗？ A: 有，要几瓶？ B: 来两瓶吧。 A: 好，一盘炒面，一碗酸辣汤，两瓶可乐。二十分钟就好了。 B: 好，二十分钟以后，我就去拿。谢谢。
11-4
1. They are talking about what are they going to cook tonight.
True
False
2. He ordered noodles and dumplings.
True
False
3. He also ordered some cola.
True
False
Listen to the challenge dialogue again and choose the best answer for the following questions. 1. What is the conversation about? a. Ordering food from a Chinese restaurant. b. Inviting friends to eat. c. Going to watch a movie. d. When classes will start. 2. How long will it take for the food to be ready? a. 10 minutes
b. 15 minutes
c. 20 minutes
d. 25 minutes
II. Character Exercises 11-5
11-6
Choose the correct traditional form for each of the following characters. 1. 双
a. 雙
b. 歡
c. 幾
2. 乐
a. 後
b. 車
c. 樂
3. 面
a. 這
b. 麵
c. 紹
4. 还
a. 還
b. 這
c. 湯
5. 员
a. 盤
b. 見
c. 員
6. 务
a. 員
b. 務
c. 兒
Write the Chinese characters for the following words. 1. xǐhuān
喜欢
6. kělè
2. háishì
还是
7. fànguǎn
饭馆
8. xiǎojiě
小姐
3. xiānsheng 4. lǜchá
先生
绿茶
5. chǎomiàn
可乐
9. fúwùyuán 10. jiǎozi
炒面
服务员
饺子
III. Grammar Exercises 11-7
Ask questions using 还是 and the choices given below. Then answer each question. 1. 吃中国菜，吃法国菜 你想吃中国菜还是吃法国菜？ 我想吃中国菜/吃法国菜。
69
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 11 Ordering Food
2. 去打球，去图书馆 你想去打球还是去图书馆？ 我想去打球/去图书馆。 3. 两点下课，三点下课 我们两点下课还是三点下课？ 我们两点下课/三点下课。 4. 是工程师，是老师 他是工程师还是老师？ 他是工程师/是老师。 5. 有四门课，有五门课 你有四门课还是五门课？ 我有四门课/五门课。 11-8
Choose an appropriate measure word from the box to complete the following sentences. Note that some measure words may be used more than once. 位
只
个
杯
瓶 辆 盘
碗
双
本
1. 常先生是一个/位很好的老师。 2. 我点两盘炒饭和两瓶可乐。 3. 爸爸有一只狗。 4. 我们家有四个人。 5. 她想喝一杯茶。 6. 我的朋友要一瓶水。 7. 那个美国人有一辆车。 8. 那三个法国人想喝一杯冰红茶和两杯咖啡。 9. 这五个学生有三本工程书。 10. 给我们三碗汤和一双筷子。
IV. Comprehensive Exercises 11-9
Translate the following sentences into Chinese. 1. Do you like to drink tea or coffee? 你喜欢喝茶还是喝咖啡？ 2. Which do you like to study, literature or engineering? 你喜欢学文学还是工程？ 3. After eating fried rice, I often want to drink a cup of tea. 吃炒饭以后，我想喝一杯茶。 4. I often go to Chinese restaurants. 我常去中国饭馆。
70
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
第十二课 Lesson 12 补充课文
Lesson 12 Making Requests
请求 Making Requests SUPPLEMENTARY PRACTICE
Read the following statements and choose whether they are true or false. 1. 本乐’s sister is coming to visit.
True
False
2. 本乐’s sister is coming here to work.
True
False
3. The speaker prefers a car with automatic transmission.
True
False
4. 本乐’s sister is interested in studying English more.
True
False
5. The speaker tells 本乐 he can go out with them.
True
False
I. Listening Exercises 12-1
12-2
Listen and write the Pinyin for the words you hear. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. 机场
jīchǎng
2. 可以
kěyǐ
3. 这次
zhècì
4. 手排挡
shǒupáidǎng
5. 飞机
fēijī
6. 白色
báisè
7. 问题
wèntí
8. 停车场
tíngchēchǎng
9. 进步
jìnbù
10. 应该
yīnggāi
11. 练习
liànxí
12. 这样
zhèyàng
Listen and complete each phrase with the correct Pinyin. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. 1.
duō liànxí jiù néng jìnbù
2.
wǒ děi qù jiē rén
3.
cóng Niǔyuē dào Shànghǎi
4.
hái bú huì kāi chē
5.
xiǎng jiè lǜ sè de chē
6.
wǒ wǎn shàng yòng chē
II. Character Exercises 12-4
12-5
Match each Chinese word with its English meaning. Then check your answers with a partner. b 1. 开车
a. to improve
g 2. 停车
b. to drive a car
d 3. 接
c. airplane
e 4. 借
d. to pick up
h 5. 练习
e. to borrow
a 6. 进步
f. problem
f 7. 问题
g. to park a car
c 8. 飞机
h. to practice
Match each character with its radical. Check your answers with a partner and discuss how each radical contributes to the meaning of the character. Try to think of another character with each of the radicals. f 1. 问
a. 土 (earth)
d 2. 接
b. 女 (female)
71
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version) a 3. 场
c. 日 (sun, day)
b 4. 妹
d. 手 (扌) (hand)
e 5. 进
e. 辵 (辶) (walk)
c 6. 明
f. 口 (mouth)
Lesson 12 Making Requests
III. Grammar Exercises 12-8
With a partner, match each Chinese sentence with its English meaning, paying special attention to the optative verbs.
12-9
d 1. 我今天得开车去学校。
a. I should drive to school today.
b 2. 我今天要开车去学校。
b. I will drive to school today.
a 3. 我今天应该开车去学校。
c. I am likely to drive to school today.
e 4. 我今天能开车去学校。
d. I have to drive to school today.
c 5. 我今天会开车去学校。
e. I am able to drive to school today.
With a partner, match each Chinese sentence with its English meaning, paying special attention to the negative optative verbs. c 1. 他不可以打手机。
a. He doesn’t want to use the cell phone.
d 2. 他不会打手机。
b. He shouldn’t use the cell phone.
e 3. 他不用打手机。
c. He is not allowed to use the cell phone.
a 4. 他不想打手机。
d. He doesn’t know how to use the cell phone.
b 5. 他不应该打手机。
e. He doesn’t need to use the cell phone.
文化点滴
CULTURE NOTES
Do you know … •
what the name of the first car produced by Chinese manufacturers was? One was a truck called the Liberation and the other was a limousine called the Red Flag.
•
what some recent car trends are? 1. Some people buying expensive cars as a status symbol; 2. The introduction of drive-through restaurants; 3. The incorporated of recreation.
•
what some concerns about increased car ownership in China are? 1. The roads cannot handle a huge increase in traffic; 2. Too many fees for maintaining and registering a car.
行动吧！LET’S GO! Answer the following questions with your partner or group. 1. 于影要从什么时候到什么时候用车？ 从 2010 年 4 月 5 日到 2010 年 4 月 15 日 2. 她在哪儿取车？ 北京；北京机场 Gate 11
72
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 12 Making Requests
3. 能不能在上海还车？ 不能 4. 她应该会开什么样的车？ 手排挡的车 5. 有问题的时候，要给谁打电话？ 北京服务电话: 010-68116688
73
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
第十二课 Lesson 12
Lesson 12 Making Requests
请求 Making Requests
I. Listening Exercises 12-1
Listen and choose the correct meaning for each sentence you hear. 1. 他想知道我要不要在他的家吃晚饭。 2. 你应该少喝一点儿咖啡。 3. 小李要开车去学校的图书馆借两本英国文学书。 4. 从纽约开车去洛杉矶得要五天。 5. 今年五月我会回家看妈妈。 6. 我明天可以用我朋友借给我的电脑给小王写电子邮件。 1. a. He wants to know whether I want to have dinner at his home. b. He wants to know if he can have dinner at my home. c. He told me that I should have dinner at his home. 2
a. You should drink more coffee. b. You should not drink coffee. c. You should drink less coffee.
3. a. Xiao Li wants me to drive him to the library to borrow two English literature books. b. Xiao Li doesn’t want to drive to the school’s library to borrow two English literature books. c. Xiao Li wants to drive to the school’s library to borrow two English literature books. 4. a. It will take five days to drive from New York to Los Angeles. b. It won’t take five days to drive from New York to Los Angeles. c. We shouldn’t drive from New York to Los Angeles. 5. a. I will go home to see my mother in May next year. b. I will go home to see my mother in May this year. c. I will go home to see my mother in June this year. 6. a. Tomorrow I can use the computer my friend lent me to write an email to Xiao Wang. b. Tomorrow I will use the computer Xiao Wang lent me to write an email to my friend. c. Tomorrow I cannot use the computer my friend lent me to write an email to Xiao Wang. 12-2
Listen to the dialogue between 方明英 and 丁文. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. 方明英﹕ 丁文，明天晚上七点在中美图书馆有中国电影。你想不想去看？ 丁文﹕
你知道是什么电影吗？
方明英﹕ 电影的名字是《和你在一起》。 丁文﹕
这是一个很好的电影，我很想看。可是我明天下午得上课，从三点半上到六点一刻。下 课以后去会不会太晚了？
方明英﹕ 没问题。每天下午六点半有车从学校到中美图书馆。我们坐车去应该能在六点三刻到图 书馆。 丁文﹕
太好了。这样我就能看这个电影了。
74
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
12-3
Lesson 12 Making Requests
1. 丁文很想看这个中国电影。
True
False
2. 丁文明天下午没有课。
True
False
3. 每天下午有车从宿舍到中美图书馆。
True
False
4. 丁文要跟方明英一起看电影。
True
False
Listen to the challenge dialogue. Though there may be some words and phrases that are unfamiliar to you, see if you can understand the general meaning by using what you have learned. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. 于影﹕嘿，本乐。你要去哪儿？ 本乐﹕于影，是你呀。我得去机场接我室友，他今天下午从北京回来。 于影﹕你室友去北京做什么？他去了多久呢？ 本乐﹕他去看他女朋友了，在北京住了有二十天呢。 于影﹕真不错，他的中文应该进步很多。 本乐﹕是啊！他应该也交了一些中国朋友吧。 于影﹕对了，本乐，明天上午你用不用你的笔记本电脑？ 本乐﹕我不用。你有什么事吗？ 于影﹕我的笔记本电脑坏了。明天上午我要做一个报告，可以借你的电脑吗？ 本乐﹕没问题。哦，你今天下午五点来我的宿舍拿电脑，好吗？ 于影﹕太好了，谢谢你。五点见。 本乐﹕再见。
12-4
1. 本乐’s roommate is coming back from China.
True
False
2. 于影 is going to give a presentation tomorrow morning.
True
False
3. 本乐 will let 于影 borrow his notebook computer.
True
False
Listen to the challenge dialogue again and choose the best answer for each of the following questions. 1. What is 本乐 doing now? a. He is surfing the Internet. b. He is having dinner. c. He is going to the airport. d. He is reading a book. 2. Who is back from Beijing? a. 于影
b. 本乐
c. 本乐’s girlfriend
d. 本乐’s roommate
3. When will 本乐 and 于影 meet again? a. Tonight at 8:00. b. Tomorrow morning. c. This afternoon at 5:00. d. Tomorrow afternoon at 5:00.
II. Character Exercises 12-5
Choose the correct traditional form for each of the following characters. a. 樂 b. 從 1. 飞
c. 飛
2. 习
a. 書
b. 習
c. 時
3. 开
a. 幾
b. 兒
c. 開
75
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
12-6
Lesson 12 Making Requests
4. 应
a. 應
b. 會
c. 麼
5. 练
a. 給
b. 練
c. 紹
6. 进
a. 還
b. 這
c. 進
Write the Chinese characters for the following phrases. 1. wǒ děi qù jīchǎng jiē wǒ mèimei
我得去机场接我妹妹
2. yīnggāi méi wèntí
应该没问题
3. wǒde Zhōngwén jìnbù le
我的中文进步了
4. wǒde chē shì báisè de
我的车是白色的
5. tíng zài wǔ hào tíngchē chǎng
停在五号停车场
III. Grammar Exercises 12-7
Choose an optative verb from the box to complete the following sentences. Note that more than one answer may be possible in some cases. 要，想，应该，得，能，可以，会 1. 他们要/想坐飞机从纽约来这儿玩儿。 2. 我的爸爸妈妈都会说中文，你可以跟他们说中文。 3. 她应该会开手排挡的车。 4. 我今天晚上能借你的车吗？
12-8
Use negative optative verbs to turn the following positive sentences into negative sentences. 1. 我要在早上六点起床。 我不用/不想在早上六点起床。 2. 我们想多喝点茶。 我们不想多喝点茶。 3. 小美应该多练习开车。 小美不应该多练习开车。 4. 我能借老师的书。 我不能借老师的书。 5. 在宿舍可以看电视。 在宿舍不可以/不能看电视。 6. 老师今天会晚点儿下课。 老师今天不会晚点儿下课。 7. 你得开车去机场。 你不用开车去机场。 8. 她应该少喝咖啡，多喝水。 她不应该少喝咖啡，多喝水。
76
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 12 Making Requests
IV. Comprehensive Exercises 12-9
Read the following passage and then answer the questions below. 我叫李红英，我在华中大学学工程。我的爸爸妈妈都是中国人，可是我在美国出生，也在美国 长大。我小的时候，爸爸妈妈说我应该学中文。可是我不喜欢学中文。爸爸妈妈跟我说中文的时 候，我总是跟他们说英文。 上大学以后我认识到学中文很重要，于是我非常想学中文了。去年八月的时候，我去问华中大 学中文系的王老师我应该上哪个中文班。王老师问我的中文怎么样。我说我能说一点儿中文，可 是我一个中文字也不会写。王老师说我应该在一年级学中文。 1. 李红英在哪个大学学习？她学什么？ 李红英在华中大学学习。她学工程。 2. 李红英小的时候跟爸爸妈妈说中文吗？ 她小的时候总是和爸爸妈妈说英文。 3. 上中文课以前，李红英会说中文、写中文吗？ 上中文课以前，她会说一点儿中文，可是一个中文字也不会写。 4. 王老师说李红英应该上哪个中文班？ 王老师说李红英应该上一年级的中文班。
77
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
第十三课 Lesson 13 补充词
Lesson 13 Clothes and Shopping
衣服、逛街 Clothes and Shopping
SUPPLEMENTARY VOCABULARY SIMPLIFIED
TRADITIONAL
PINYIN
1.
特大
特大
tè dà
Adj.
extra large
2.
特小
特小
tè xiǎo
Adj.
extra small
3.
货币
貨幣
huòbì
N.
currency
4.
欧元
歐元
Ōuyuán
N.
euro
钱币表达方法 [Qiánbì biǎodá fāngfǎ] WAYS TO EXPRESS MONEY IN CHINESE Written form: SIMPLIFIED
TRADITIONAL
PINYIN
1.
元
元
yuán
N.
dollar
2.
角
角
jiǎo
N.
(10 角 = 1 元) (similar to a dime)
3.
分
分
fēn
N.
(100 分 = 10 角 = 1 元) (similar to a penny)
Spoken form: SIMPLIFIED
TRADITIONAL
PINYIN
4.
块
塊
kuài
N.
dollar
5.
毛
毛
máo
N.
(10 毛 = 1 块) (similar to a dime)
6.
分
分
fēn
N.
(100 分 = 10 毛 = 1 块) (similar to a penny)
常见衣服 [Chángjiàn yīfu]
COMMON ITEMS OF CLOTHING
Measure Word: 件 SIMPLIFIED
TRADITIONAL
PINYIN
1.
上衣
上衣
shàngyī
N.
upper-clothing
2.
大衣
大衣
dàyī
N.
overcoat
3.
外套
外套
wàitào
N.
coat
4.
背心
背心
bèixīn
N.
vest
5.
西装
西裝
xīzhuāng
N.
suit
6.
夹克衫
夾克衫
jiákèshān
N.
jacket
(夹克)
(夾克)
(jiákè)
毛衣
毛衣
máoyī
N.
sweater
7.
78
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version) 8.
9.
Lesson 13 Clothes and Shopping
T-恤衫
T-恤衫
tīxùshān
(T-恤)
(T-恤)
(tīxù)
内衣
內衣
nèiyī
N.
T-shirt
N.
underwear
Measure Word (Classifier): 条(条) SIMPLIFIED
TRADITIONAL
PINYIN
10.
长裤
長褲
chángkù
N.
long pants
11.
短裤
短褲
duǎnkù
N.
shorts
12.
牛仔裤
牛仔褲
niúzǎikù
N.
jeans
13.
内裤
內褲
nèikù
N.
underpants
14.
裙子
裙子
qúnzi
N.
skirt
15.
迷你裙
迷你裙
mínmqún
N.
miniskirt
Measure Word (Classifier): 双(双) SIMPLIFIED
TRADITIONAL
PINYIN
16.
鞋子
鞋子
xiézi
N.
shoes
17.
皮鞋
皮鞋
píxié
N.
leather shoes
18.
球鞋
球鞋
qiúxié
N.
sneakers
19.
拖鞋
拖鞋
tuōxié
N.
slippers
20.
凉鞋
涼鞋
liángxié
N.
sandals
21.
靴子
靴子
xuēzi
N.
boots
22.
袜子
襪子
wàzi
N.
socks
常见饰品 [Chángjiàn shìpǐn]
COMMON ACCESSORIES
SIMPLIFIED
TRADITIONAL
PINYIN
1.
手表
手錶
shǒubiǎo
N.
watch
2.
耳环
耳環
ěrhuán
N.
earrings
3.
手镯
手鐲
shǒuzhuó
N.
bracelet
4.
戒指
戒指
jièzhi
N.
ring
5.
项链
項鏈
xiàngliàn
N.
necklace
6.
眼镜
眼鏡
yǎnjìng
N.
glasses
7.
帽子
帽子
màozi
N.
hat
8.
手套
手套
shǒutào
N.
gloves
9.
手绢
手絹
shǒujuàn
N.
handkerchief
10.
领带
領帶
lǐngdài
N.
necktie
11.
围巾
圍巾
wéijīn
N.
scarf
79
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 13 Clothes and Shopping
常见穿衣动作 [Chángjiàn chuānyī dòngzuò]
COMMON ACTIONS FOR CLOTHES
SIMPLIFIED
TRADITIONAL
PINYIN
1.
穿上
穿上
chuānshàng
V.C.
to put on (regular clothes)
2.
戴上
戴上
dàishàng
V.C.
to put on (accessories)
3.
脱下
脫下
tuōxià
V.C.
to take off (regular clothes)
4.
摘下
摘下
zhāixià
V.C.
to take off (accessories)
常见颜色 [Chángjiàn yánsè]
COMMON COLORS
SIMPLIFIED
TRADITIONAL
PINYIN
1.
红色
紅色
hóngsè
Adj.
red
2.
白色
白色
báisè
Adj.
white
3.
黑色
黑色
hēisè
Adj.
black
4.
黄色
黃色
huángsè
Adj.
yellow
5.
绿色
綠色
lǜsè
Adj.
green
6.
蓝色
藍色
lánsè
Adj.
blue
7.
紫色
紫色
zǐsè
Adj.
purple
8.
粉红色
粉紅色
fěnhóngsè
Adj.
pink
9.
橙色
橙色
chéngsè
Adj.
orange
(橘色)
(橘色)
(júsè)
10.
灰色
灰色
huīsè
Adj.
gray
11.
棕色
棕色
zōngsè
Adj.
brown
(咖啡色)
(咖啡色)
(kāfēisè)
12.
金黄色
金黃色
jīnhuángsè
Adj.
gold
13.
银灰色
銀灰色
yínhuīsè
Adj.
silver
14.
深色
深色
shēnsè
Adj.
dark
15.
深蓝色
深藍色
shēnlánsè
Adj.
dark blue
16.
浅色
淺色
qiǎnsè
Adj.
light
17.
浅绿色
淺綠色
qiǎnlǜsè
Adj.
light green
18.
彩色
彩色
cǎisè
Adj.
multicolored
补充课文
SUPPLEMENTARY PRACTICE
Read the following statements and choose whether they are true or false. 1. The speaker tried on a yellow shirt and a red shirt.
True
False
2. The speaker bought a black skirt.
True
False
3. Of the things 子英 tried on, the skirt looked better on her.
True
False
4. 子英 bought a skirt for 50 dollars.
True
False
5. The speaker and 子英 went to see a movie before shopping.
True
False
80
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 13 Clothes and Shopping
I. Listening Exercises 13-1
Listen and write the Pinyin for the sentences you hear. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. Nǐ xiǎng mǎi zhètiáo qúnzi ma? 2. Wǒ xiǎng shìshi zhèjiàn bái chènshān. 3. Wǒ juéde nǐ chuān nàtiáo kùzi gèng hǎokàn. 4. Wǒ xǐhuān hēisè de huòzhě hóngsè de yùndòngshān. 5. Zhèjiàn tīxùshān duōshǎo qián? Bú guì, èr shí jiǔ kuài sān máo wǔ fēn.
II. Character Exercises 13-3
Match each Chinese word or phrase with its English meaning. Then check your answers with a partner or the class.
13-4
e. 1. 黄裙子
a. red skirt
c. 2. 黑裤子
b. to help
a. 3. 红裙子
c. black pants
f. 4. 穿裤子
d. pretty good
g. 5. 让
e. yellow skirt
b. 6. 帮
f. to wear pants
d. 7.不错
g. to let, to allow
h. 8. 比较
h. relatively, comparatively
Work with a partner or in small groups. Write the radical and its meaning for each of the following characters. Then write as many characters with the same radical as you can. (Refer to the list of radicals on page 255 for help.) Example:
吗 [ma]
口 mouth
呢 吃 喝 和
1. 衫
衤 clothing
衬 裙 裤
2. 钱
釒 metal
错
3. 件
亻 person
你 他 什 们 个 作 住 做位信借停
4. 试
言 speech
请 谁 说 课 话 认 识 谢 让 该
5. 觉
见 see
视
6. 块
土 earth
地 址 坐 场
III. Grammar Exercises 13-7
With a partner, use the prompts in parentheses to complete the following sentences with a duplicated verb phrase. 1. 这件衬衫我穿太大了，你 _试试_ 吧。(to have a try) 2. 这是谁的车？我来 _看看_ 车号。(to have a look) 3. 这是我的室友。来，你们 _认识认识_。 (to get to know each other) 4. 你知道这本书吗？我来给你_介绍介绍_。 (to give you a little introduction)
81
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version) 13-8
Lesson 13 Clothes and Shopping
With a partner, take turns asking and answering the following questions. Use 或者 when answering the questions. 1. 您想买什么？ 我想买……或者……。 2. 你喜欢哪件衬衫？ 我喜欢黑色或者……色的衬衫。 3. 你说我穿什么好看。 你穿……或者……好看。 4. 你今天晚上想吃什么？ 我今天晚上想吃……或者……。
文化点滴
CULTURE NOTES
Do you know … •
what a Qipao and Tangzhuang are? Answer: They are traditional Chinese clothing.
•
if traditional or Western-style clothing is more common in China today? Answer: Western-style clothing is much more common in China today.
•
why red is such a popular color in clothing for Chinese people? Answer: It is because red is commonly worn as it is considered a very lucky color.
行动吧！LET’S GO! Answer the following questions with your partner or group. 1. How would you say the following prices in Chinese? Use the chart above and words for money. a.
100 元
b. 15 元 8 角
100 块
15 块 8 角
c.
28 元 5 角 7 分
d. 33 元 6 角
28 块 5 毛 7 分
33 块 6 毛
2. After paying, if change is due, the salesperson will give you change, or 找钱 [zhǎoqián] (V.O.: to give change). The salesperson may say something like “找你十块钱” [Zhǎo nǐ shíkuài qián] (Here’s 10 dollars change). How would you say, “Here’s 8 dollars change”? How would you say, “Here’s 5 毛 change”? 找 你 8 块钱。 找你 5 毛。 3. You would like to 换钱 [huànqián] (exchange money) at the 银行 [yínháng] (bank). The person ahead of you exchanged $200 USD. They said “我想换钱。我要换 200 块美金.” How could you tell the bank teller that you would like to exchange money? How might you say you would like to exchange $100 USD? 我想换钱。 我要 换 100 块美金。
82
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
第十三课 Lesson 13
Lesson 13 Clothes and Shopping
衣服、逛街 Clothes and Shopping
I. Listening Exercises 13-1
Listen to the dialogue between 方明飞 and 店员. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. 店员﹕
先生，您想买点儿什么？
方明飞﹕ 我想买一条裤子。有我穿的吗？ 店员﹕
有。你看这条蓝的怎么样？
方明飞﹕ 我不太喜欢这条蓝的。我想试试这条黑色的。 店员﹕
那儿还有黑色的。你看看。
方明飞﹕ 好，我就买这条黑色的。 店员﹕
先生，你看看这件黄的衬衫。很不错吧？
方明飞﹕ 是很不错，可是我不买了。以后再买吧。
13-2
1. 方明飞想买一件衬衫。
True
False
2. 店员给他看看蓝色和黑色的裤子。
True
False
3. 方明飞喜欢黑色的裤子。
True
False
4. 店员说黄衬衫很好看。
True
False
5. 方明飞说黑色的衬衫很不错。
True
False
Listen to the sentences and fill in the blanks with the words you hear. 1. 我想买一件衬衫或者一条裤子。 2. 你帮我看看。我穿这件好吗？ 3. 这条裙子多少钱？ 4. 请等一下。 5. 我比较喜欢黑色的大衣。
13-3
Listen to the challenge dialogue. Though there may be some words and phrases that are unfamiliar to you, see if you can understand the general meaning by using what you have learned. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. 方子英﹕ 爱红，你的红裙子真好看，是男朋友买的吗？ 毛爱红﹕ 不是，子英，我男朋友才不会给我买裙子呢！这是我自己在网上买的。 方子英﹕ 我没有在网上买过衣服。在网上买衣服不可以试穿，那你怎么知道穿上以后好看 不好看？ 毛爱红﹕ 其实这个样子的裙子，我已经在服装店试穿过了。 方子英﹕ 那为什么你还要在网上买呢？ 毛爱红﹕ 我喜欢穿红色的裙子，可是在服装店只有绿色的和白色的裙子。 方子英﹕ 哦，我知道了，网上有红色的裙子，所以你上网去买红色裙子了。 毛爱红﹕ 对。其实上网买衣服很方便。 方子英﹕ 是吗？要是我上网买的衣服，收到了以后，觉得不喜欢，不想要了，怎么办？ 毛爱红﹕ 很容易，你可以把衣服寄回去。
83
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 13 Clothes and Shopping
方子英﹕ 太好了，那我等一下也上网去买衣服。 毛爱红﹕ 我的电脑在这儿，我们现在一起上网看看吧，我还想买一件白衬衫呢。
13-4
1. They are talking about a computer.
True
False
2. 爱红’s boyfriend doesn’t buy skirts for her.
True
False
3. 爱红 is wearing a green skirt.
True
False
Listen to the challenge dialogue again and choose the best answer for each of the following questions. 1. Where are 爱红 and 子英 now? a. They are in a clothing store. b. They are in a restaurant. c. They are sitting in front of a computer. d. They are in the movie theater. 2. What color of skirt does 爱红 like? a. Green. b. Red. c. White. d. Yellow. 3. What would 爱红 like to do now? a. She is going to the store to buy another skirt. b. She is going to return the clothes she doesn’t like. c. She is going to try on the skirt she bought. d. She is going to look at clothes online with 子英.
II. Character Exercises 13-5
13-6
Choose the correct traditional form for each of the following characters. a. 衫 b. 襯 1. 衬
c. 見
2. 觉
a. 覺
b. 黃
c. 幫
3. 买
a. 賣
b. 買
c. 票
4. 裤
a. 衣
b. 裙
c. 褲
5. 让
a. 讓
b. 試
c. 說
Match the Pinyin with the corresponding Chinese character. d 1. wèi
a. 穿
a 2. chuān
b. 裙
e 3. tiáo
c. 试
g 4. mǎi
d. 位
b 5. qún
e. 条
h 6. ràng
f. 衫
c 7. shì
g. 买
f 8. shān
h. 让
84
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 13 Clothes and Shopping
III. Grammar Exercises 13-7
Write the correct measure words. 1. 一条裤子
2. 两件衬衫
3. 三双鞋
4. 四条裙子
5. 五条牛仔裤
6. 六件运动衫
7. 七只小狗
8. 八张电影票
IV. Comprehensive Exercises 13-9
Complete the following dialogues, using the clues given in parentheses. 1. A: 你说那件衬衫怎么样？ B: 让我看看。(Let me have a look.) 2. A: 我应该穿几号的？ B: 你试试六号或者七号的。(Try a size 6 or a size 7.) 3. A: 我不知道这个电影是说什么的。 B: 我给你介绍介绍。(I’ll give you a little introduction.) 4. A: 上海春卷真好吃。 B: 真的吗？我也试试/尝尝。(I’ll taste it as well.) 5. A: 手排挡的车我还不会开。 B: 你应该学学。(You should learn how to drive.)
85
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
第十四课 Lesson 14 补充课文
Lesson 14 Birthdays and Celebrations
生日和庆祝 Birthdays and Celebrations SUPPLEMENTARY PRACTICE
Choose the correct answer for the following questions about the passage. 1. 她今年多大？ a. 十八岁
b. 二十岁
c. 二十一岁
d. 二十八岁
b. 爱红
c. 她男朋友
d. 她同学
b. 二月二十日
c. 六月十八日
d. 二月十八日
b. 在她朋友家
c. 在她男朋友家
d. 在爱红家
2. 谁为她开生日会？ a. 她朋友 3. 她的生日是哪一天？ a. 一月二十日 4. 她的生日会在哪儿开？ a. 在她家
I. Listening Exercises 14-1
14-2
Listen and write the Pinyin for the phrases you hear. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. 1.
xīngqī
2.
shēngrì
3.
cānjiā
4.
dàngāo
5.
dìzhǐ
6.
dìtú
7.
yǒukòng
8.
wǔhuì
Listen and write the Pinyin for the words you hear. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. Àimíng:
Zhège zhōumò shì wǒde shēngrì. Wǒ yào kāi yígè wǔhuì. Nǐ néng lái ma?
Xiǎoyīng:
Tài hǎo le! Wǒ yídìng qù. Nǐ jīnnián duōdà?
Àimíng:
Wǒ èrshíyī suì. Nǐde shēngrì shì jǐyuèjǐhào?
Xiǎoyīng:
Wǒde shēngrì shì sānyuè shíliù hào. Wǒ jīnnián èrshí suì.
II. Character Exercises 14-4
Work with a partner. Find words that have the following radicals in the Language in Use dialogue, and write them next to the radical.
14-5
1. 宀 家，定，客
2. 土
地，址
3. 木 棒，样
4. 米 糕
5. 月
期，朋
6. 力 加，男
7. 门 开
8. 辵 (辶)
送，过
9. 厶 参
Match each Chinese word with its English meaning. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. g 1. 地址
a. to participate
a 2. 参加
b. map
d 3. 舞会
c. week
f 4. 蛋糕
d. dance party
h 5. 不客气
e. birthday
c 6. 星期
f. cake
e 7. 生日
g. address
b 8. 地图
h. you are welcome
86
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 14 Birthdays and Celebrations
III. Grammar Exercises 14-8
Read 子英’s to-do list below. In pairs, ask and answer questions about each item on 子英’s list. Example: A: 子英今天要做什么？ B: 她要为她男朋友开一个晚会。 子英’s to do list: 1. Hold a party for her boyfriend
为男朋友开一个晚会
2. Write an email to her roommate
给室友写一封电子邮件
3. Make a birthday cake for her younger sister
为妹妹做一个生日蛋糕
4. Buy a movie ticket for Dazhong’s girlfriend
为大中的女朋友买一张电影票
文化点滴
CULTURE NOTES
Do you know … •
what the twelve animals of the Chinese Zodiac are? Answer: Rat, ox, tiger, rabbit, dragon, snake, horse, sheep, monkey, rooster, dog and boar.
•
what calendar the Chinese Zodiac is associated with? Answer: Chinese lunar calendar
•
what this year’s animal sign is?
87
Review Answer
Lesson 12 to Lesson 14
复习 Review Lesson 12 to Lesson 14
II. Writing and Character Review 1. Radical practice game. Form groups of three or four. Write the following radicals on separate squares of paper. 土
辵 (辶)
人 (亻)
衣/衤
木
Turn all the squares over so that the blank sides face up. As you take turns, flip over one of the paper squares and say a character you have learned that has the same radical in it. Write the character on a piece of paper so the group can keep track of which characters have already been said. (Once a character has been said, it cannot be used again.) Keep playing until you have come up with as many characters as you can think of. Then compare your group’s list with other groups. Did you find all the same characters for the radicals? Key: 土﹕场 地 块 辵 (辶)﹕送 过 进 还 人 (亻)﹕件 做 借 停 衣/衤﹕衬 裙 裤 木﹕条 杯 机 样 棒
III. Comprehensive Review 2. Work with a partner or in small groups. Three friends, 爱红, 本乐, and 子英, are preparing for a friend’s birthday party. Discuss the following clues and use the chart below to figure out what each person does before and during the party. Clues: 1. 爱红不会开车。子英很喜欢开车，可是她没有车。 2. 本乐也没有车，可是他今天会跟他姐姐借车。 3. 子英喜欢吃东西，可是不喜欢做饭。本乐做的蛋糕不太好吃。 4. 本乐先从宿舍到电影院买电影票，然后去机场接人。 5. 子英想买一条红裙子。她觉得裙子应该是一个很好的礼物。 6. 本乐很会唱歌，他一定会唱歌给大家听。 7. 爱红不忙，能去跳舞。
88
Review Answer
Lesson 12 to Lesson 14
做 饭
开 车 接 人
买 礼 物
为 她 做 蛋 糕
送 裙 子
请 她 看 电 影
唱 歌
跳 舞
做 服 务 员
爱红
✓
✓
✓
✓
本乐
✓
✓
✓
子英
✓
✓
✓
With your partner or group, answer the following questions, using the information above. 1. 谁可以做什么？谁会送什么礼物？在舞会，谁会做什么？ 爱红可以做饭，本乐可以去开车接人，子英可以去买礼物。在舞会上，爱红可以做服务员，本乐会 唱歌，爱红会跳舞。 2. 你觉得本乐应该帮爱红做蛋糕吗？ 本乐应该不要帮爱红做蛋糕。(他做的蛋糕不好吃。) 3. 明天应该是谁去看电影？ 明天应该是本乐(和过生日的朋友)去看电影。 4. 一张电影票是十块钱。本乐买两张要多少钱？ 买两张要用二十块钱。 5. 本乐先从宿舍到哪儿去？ 本乐先从宿舍到电影院去。 6. 你觉得他们的舞会好玩儿吗？想不想参加？ (Answers will vary: 我觉得好玩／不好玩；我要参加／我不想参加。)
89
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
第十四课 Lesson 14
Lesson 14 Birthdays and Celebrations
生日和庆祝 Birthdays and Celebrations
I. Listening Exercises 14-1
Listen to the sentences and fill in the blanks with the words you hear 1. 三月十八日是我的生日。 2. 我今年十九岁，明年二十岁。 3. 明天是我的生日舞会。请你参加。
14-2
Listen to the dialogue. Then choose the best answer for each of the following questions. 方明明﹕ 星星，你今年多大？是二十岁还是二十一岁？ 钱星星﹕ 我今年二十二岁。明明，你呢？ 方明明﹕ 我现在是二十岁，可是下个星期我就是二十一岁了。下个星期五是我的生日。我有一个 生日晚会。你能来吗？ 钱星星﹕ 下个星期五晚上我没有事。我一定去。 方明明﹕ 太好了！还有很多朋友也都会来。我妈妈还要给我做一个大蛋糕。 钱星星﹕ 真的吗？太棒了！我很喜欢吃蛋糕，我可以多吃一点儿蛋糕吗？ 方明明﹕ 没问题！ 1. How old is Xingxing? a. She is twenty. b. She is twenty-one. c. She is twenty-two. d. She is twenty-three. 2. When is Mingming’s birthday party? a. This Friday. b. Next Friday. c. This Saturday. d. Next Saturday. 3. How old is Mingming going to be? a. Twenty. b. Twenty-one. c. Twenty-two. d. Twenty-three. 4. Who does Mingming say will also be coming to his birthday party? a. Lots of his friends. b. His father and his girlfriend. c. His classmates and his brother. d. His sister and his sister’s boyfriend.
90
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 14 Birthdays and Celebrations
5. Who will make the birthday cake? a. His roommate. b. His friend. c. Xingxing. d. His mom. 14-3
Listen to the challenge dialogue. Though there may be some words and phrases that are unfamiliar to you, see if you can understand the general meaning by using what you have learned. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. 爱红﹕ 子英，生日快乐！ 子英﹕ 好大的蛋糕，太谢谢了。对了，爱红，你怎么知道今天是我的生日？ 爱红﹕ 是你室友说的。 子英﹕ 这个蛋糕是你做的吗？真漂亮。我都舍不得吃。 爱红﹕ 对，这是特地为你做的大蛋糕。 子英﹕ 谢谢你。今天晚上我男朋友要为我开一个生日晚会，你能来参加吗？ 爱红﹕ 哦，对不起，我今天晚上得去机场接我妹妹，不能参加。 子英﹕ 没关系。对了，你的生日是几月几号？ 爱红﹕ 我的生日是上个月十号，刚刚过了。 子英﹕ 好，我记住你的生日了。我也要学做蛋糕，明年你生日的时候，我来为你做一个大蛋糕！ 爱红﹕ 明年我的生日也是中国的新年，我们还可以一起吃年糕呢。 子英﹕ 那我也要学做中国的年糕！ 1. They are talking about last year’s Chinese New Year party.
True
False
2. 爱红 is going to 子英’s party tonight.
True
False
True
False
3. 子英 is going to learn how to make a birthday cake and a Chinese New Year cake. 14-4
Listen to the challenge dialogue again and choose the best answer for each of the following questions. 1. What does 爱红 give 子英 as a birthday present? a. A new book. b. A birthday cake. c. Dumplings. d. A pack of tea. 2. How does 爱红 know about 子英’s birthday? a. She heard it from 子英’s roommate. b. She is 子英’s roommate. c. 子英 told her in the past. d. She heard it from 子英’s boyfriend. 3. When is 爱红’s birthday? a. On the 10th of last month. b. On the 10th of next month. c. Today. d. During the Christmas holiday.
91
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 14 Birthdays and Celebrations
II. Character Exercises 14-5
14-6
Match each traditional character with its simplified form. f 1. 歲
a. 会
g 2. 過
b. 为
b 3. 為
c. 图
e 4. 參
d. 气
d 5. 氣
e. 参
a 6. 會
f. 岁
c 7. 圖
g. 过
Write the following Pinyin sentences in Chinese characters. 1. Wǒde shēngrì shì yīyuè sān shí hào, xīngqīsì. 我的生日是一月三十号，星期四。 2. Zhè shì nǐde péngyou sòng nǐde dà dàngāo ma? 这是你的朋友送你的大蛋糕吗？ 3. Nǐ jīnnián duō dà? Wǒ jīnnián shíjiǔ suì. 你今年多大？ 我今年十九岁。
III. Grammar Exercises 14-7
Fill in the blanks according to this year’s calendar. 1. 今年春节 [Chūnjié] (Spring Festival / Chinese New Year) 是_________________ (date), ___________ (day of the week)。 2. 今天是 _________________ (date), ___________ (day of the week)。 3. 下个星期日是___________________ (date)。 4. 今年的感恩节 [Gǎn’ēnjié] (Thanksgiving) 是 _________ (date) ____________(day of the week)。 5. 圣诞节 [Shèngdànjié] (Christmas) 是 _______________ (date) ____________ (day of the week)。 6. 我的生日是 ______________ (date), 今年在 ____________ (day of the week)。
14-8
Rewrite the following sentences to include 为 and another person. 1. 我要做蛋糕。
2. 我妈妈想买衬衫。
3. 小明要去图书馆借中文书。
4. 妹妹要做炒面。
5. 我们想开中文班的晚会。
92
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 14 Birthdays and Celebrations
IV. Comprehensive Exercises 14-9
Complete the following sentences, using the clues given in parentheses. 1. 下个星期日我要为我的朋友开一个生日晚会。 (hold a birthday party for my friend) 2. 你可以为我点中国饺子吗? (make an order of Chinese dumplings for me) 3. 后天是妈妈的生日，我要为她买一件好看的衬衫。 (buy a very pretty shirt for her)
93
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 15 Location and Position
第十五课 Lesson 15
地点和位置 Location and Position
补充课文
SUPPLEMENTARY PRACTICE
Read the following statements and choose whether they are true or false. 1. Tian Jin lives in the dorm.
True
False
2. The kitchen is shared with other people.
True
False
3. Tian Jin often goes to study at the library.
True
False
4. There is a park in front of the library.
True
False
5
True
False
People usually only exercise in the park during the weekend.
I. Listening Exercises 15-1
Listen and choose the Pinyin with the correct tone for each item you hear. Then check your answers with a partner or the class.
15-2
1. a.
gòngyòng chǔfàng
a.
kètīng / cāntīng
b.
gōngyōng chùfáng
b.
c.
gōngyòng chúfáng
2.
a.
túshūguán
kétīng / càntīng
b.
túshūguǎn
c.
kètíng / cántìng
c.
tǔshúguàn
a.
cánguàn
a.
dìzhǐ
3.
4. a.
hǒubiàn
b.
hòubiān
b.
cànguàn
b.
dīzhǐ
c.
hōubián
c.
cānguān
c.
dǐzhì
5.
6.
Look again at the Language in Use dialogue. Listen to the following questions about the dialogue and write your answers in Pinyin. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. Tián Jìn de sùshè yǒuméiyǒu chúfáng? Yǒu chúfáng, shì gōngyòng de. 2. Tián Jìn de fángjiān zài chúfáng de nǎbiān? Tián Jìn de fángjiān zài chúfáng de pángbiān. 3. Zài kètīng hé wòshìde zhōngjiān shì shénme? Zài kètīng hé wòshìde zhōngjiān shì xǐzǎojiān. 4. Tián Jìn chángcháng zài nǎr xuéxí? Tián Jìn chángcháng zài túshūguǎn xuéxí. 5. Gōngyuán zài nǎr? Tián Jìn cháng qù nàr zuò shénme? Gōngyuán zài túshūguǎn de hòubiān. Tián Jìn cháng qù nàr dǎqiú.
II. Character Exercises 15-4
Match each Chinese word with its English meaning. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. g 1. 欢迎
a. living room
f 2. 公园
b. for public use
d 3. 餐厅
c. to visit
b 4. 公用
d. dining room
e 5. 厨房
e. kitchen
94
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
15-5
a 6. 客厅
f. park
c 7. 参观
g. to welcome
Lesson 15 Location and Position
Work with a partner. Write the radical for the following characters on the first line. Then, find another character with the same radical in the Language in Use dialogue and write it on the second line. (Refer to the list of radicals on page 255 for help.) Example: 吗
口
呢
1. 边
辵
进
2. 厨
广
厅
3. 洗
氵
澡
4. 客
宀
室
III. Grammar Exercises 15-8
Work with a partner. Look at the pictures and answer the questions using 有, 在, or 是 with position words. 1. 客厅里边有什么？
电视
2. 电视的前面是什么？
沙发和桌子
3. 电话在哪儿？
桌子上边
4. 桌子上有书吗？
有，桌子上有书
5. 桌子的下面有什么？
小猫
6. 小猫在哪儿？
桌子的下面
文化点滴
CULTURE NOTES
Do you know … •
what Feng Shui is and what its goal is? Feng Shui is the art or study of placement to produce harmony in living spaces. Its goal is to maintain harmony and balance between 阴 and 阳, which are opposite yet interconnected forces in the universe and in nature.
•
what Qi is? Qi is the invisible flow of energy that circulates through the earth and sky, and in all life forms.
•
what some Feng Shui remedies are? Common remedies for the home include proper placement of the bed and clearing clutter to remove blocked energy. Plants such as “lucky bamboo” are also often used as Feng Shui remedies.
趣味中文
FUN WITH CHINESE
2. Which position word in 有缘千里来相会，无缘对面不相识 did you learn in this lesson? Write it on the line and use it in a sentence. 对面: 我的对面是你。
95
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 15 Location and Position
行动吧！LET’S GO! Answer the following questions with your partner or group. 1. 长城在北京的哪一边﹖ 北边 2. 故宫的南边有什么﹖ 天坛 3. 颐和园在机场的东边还是西边﹖ 西边
96
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
第十五课 Lesson 15
Lesson 15 Location and Position
地点和位置 Location and Position
I. Listening Exercises 15-1
Listen to Liang Zhi’s introduction of his dorm. Draw a floor plan based on what you hear. 你们好！这是我的宿舍。我的宿舍在二楼。我有一个卧室，一个客厅，一个餐厅，一个洗澡间， 还有一个厨房。卧室在客厅的右边，洗澡间在卧室的后面。客厅的左边有一个餐厅，餐厅在厨房 的前边。我的宿舍很大，对面就是图书馆。我很喜欢我的宿舍，我常常在宿舍里边看书。 二楼 厨房
洗澡间 客厅
餐厅
15-2
15-3
卧室
Choose whether each statement below is true or false according to Liang Zhi’s introduction. 1. His dorm is on the third floor.
True
False
2. His dorm doesn’t have a kitchen.
True
False
3. His dorm is spacious.
True
False
4. The library is next to his dorm.
True
False
5. He likes to read in his dorm.
True
False
Listen to the challenge dialogue. Though there may be some words and phrases that are unfamiliar to you, see if you can understand the general meaning by using what you have learned. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. 田进﹕
喂，包志中，我现在要去你的宿舍。你的宿舍在哪儿？
包志中﹕ 在图书馆的对面，咖啡店的旁边。我的房间号码是 203。 田进﹕
好，待会儿见。
包志中﹕ 田进，欢迎来我的宿舍！ 田进﹕
你的宿舍离学校很近，我从学校走过来，十分钟就到了。
包志中﹕ 是呀，我的宿舍地点很好，还很大呢。 田进﹕
你的宿舍有几个房间？
包志中﹕ 有两个房间。过了客厅的第一个房间是我的卧室，第二个是我室友的卧室。 田进﹕
我怎么看不到厨房呢？
包志中﹕ 对，因为这是学校的宿舍，学生不能在宿舍做饭，所以我们没有厨房。 田进﹕
你和你室友常在宿舍学习吗？
包志中﹕ 我常在宿舍学习，我室友常去图书馆学习。 田进﹕
你们的宿舍又大、离学校和图书馆又近，真不错。
97
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
15-4
Lesson 15 Location and Position
1. Bao Zhizhong’s dorm is small.
True
False
2. Bao Zhizhong’s dorm has two bedrooms.
True
False
3. There is a kitchen in the dorm.
True
False
Listen to the challenge dialogue again and choose the best answer for each of the following questions. 1. Where is Bao Zhizhong’s dorm? a. By the shopping center. b. Behind the library. c. Next to Tian Jin’s apartment. d. Next to a cafe. 2. It takes ten minutes to walk from which place to Bao Zhizhong’s dorm? a. From the cafe. b. From the library. c. From Tiao Jin’s apartment. d. From school. 3. Where do Bao Zhizhong and his roommate usually go to study? a. Bao Zhizhong studies in the library, while his roommate studies in the dorm. b. They both study in the library. c. Bao Zhizhong studies in the dorm, while his roommate studies in the library. d. They both study in the dorm.
II. Character Exercises 15-5
Write the letter of the correct position word for each question. a. 里边
15-6
b. 旁边
c. 对面
d. 上边
e. 中间
1. 中文书在桌子的什么地方？
d
2. 小明在他朋友的什么地方？
e
3. 小明在文中的什么地方？
f
4. 手机在背包的哪儿？
a
5. 中文老师在桌子的什么地方？
b
6. 图书馆在宿舍的什么地方？
c
Match the Chinese characters with the corresponding Pinyin. b 1. 卧室
a. chúfáng
f 2. 客厅
b. wòshì
a 3. 厨房
c. cāntīng
h 4. 公园
d. cānguān
c 5. 餐厅
e. gōngyòng
g 6. 洗澡
f. kètīng
d 7. 参观
g. xǐzǎo
e 8. 公用
h. gōngyuán
98
f. 后边
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 15 Location and Position
III. Grammar Exercises 15-7
Look at the following floor plan for an apartment in the new dorm. Then answer the questions that follow.
厨房
餐厅 洗澡间 卧室 客厅 走廊 前门
1. 卧室在哪儿？ 卧室在宿舍的右边。 2. 卧室的对面是什么？ 卧室的对面是客厅。 3. 厨房和洗澡间的中间是什么？ 厨房和洗澡间的中间是餐厅。 4. 客厅和卧室的中间有什么？ 客厅和卧室的中间有洗澡间和走廊。 5. 餐厅在客厅的哪边？ 餐厅在客厅的后边。 15-8
Look at the pictures and fill in the blanks with 有，在，是。 1. 裙子
在
鞋子的右边。
裙子的左边
是
鞋子。
2. 房子的后边
有
一棵树。
房子 __在__ 树的前边。 3. 球的左边 衬衫
在
有
一件衬衫，鞋子
在
球的下边。
球的左边，球的下边
是
鞋子。
99
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
第十六课 Lesson 16
Lesson 16 Hobbies and Sports
爱好和运动 Hobbies and Sports
运动项目 [Yùndòng xiàngmù] SPORTS ITEMS SIMPLIFIED
TRADITIONAL
PINYIN
1.
骑自行车
騎自行車
qí zìxíngchē
V.O.
to ride a bike
2.
划船
划船
huáchuán
V.O.
to row a boat
3.
潜水
潛水
qiánshuǐ
V.O.
to dive
4.
游泳
游泳
yóuyǒng
V.O.
to swim
5.
钓鱼
釣魚
diàoyú
V.O.
to fish
6.
滑雪
滑雪
huáxuě
V.O.
to ski
7.
滑冰
滑冰
huábīng
V.O.
to skate
8.
冰球
冰球
bīngqiú
N.
ice hockey
9.
爬山
爬山
páshān
V.O.
to climb a mountain
10
远足
遠足
yuǎnzú
N.
a hike, hiking
11
棒球
棒球
bàngqiú
N.
baseball
12
橄榄球
橄欖球
gǎnlǎnqiú
N.
football
13
足球
足球
zúqiú
N.
soccer
14
篮球
籃球
lánqiú
N.
basketball
15
网球
網球
wǎngqiú
N.
tennis
16
高尔夫球
高爾夫球
gāo’ěrfūqiú
N.
golf
17
排球
排球
páiqiú
N.
volleyball
18
羽毛球
羽毛球
yǔmáoqiú
N.
badminton
19
举重
舉重
jǔzhòng
V.O.
to lift weights
20
跑步
跑步
pǎobù
V.O.
to run
补充课文
SUPPLEMENTARY PRACTICE
Choose the correct answer for the following questions. 1. 孙信美正在学 ____。 a. 锻炼
b. 教练
c. 打篮球
d. 游泳
2. 谁是孙信美的教练？ a. 杨欢
b. 杨欢的男朋友
c. 男朋友的室友
d. 孙信美没有教练
3. 杨欢的男朋友常打篮球吗？ a. 不, 他不喜欢打篮球。
b. 是, 他常打篮球。
c. 不, 他不常打篮球。
d. 不, 他不会打篮球。
4. 谁喜欢锻炼？ a. 孙信美
b. 杨欢
c. 杨欢的男朋友
100
d. 他们都喜欢
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 16 Hobbies and Sports
5. 杨欢会做什么菜？ a. 美国菜
b. 饺子
c. 韩国炒面
d. 日本菜
I. Listening Exercises 16-1
Listen and choose the Pinyin with the correct tone for each word you hear. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. 1.
4.
16-2
a. dǎ lánqiú
2.
a. bāo jiàozi
3.
a. kán qiùsài
b. dà lànqiú
b. bāo jiǎozi
b. kān qiùsài
c. dá lānqiú
c. bǎo jiǎozi
c. kàn qiúsài
a. jiāo yóuyǒng
5.
a. tìyùguán
6.
a. zuō zuóyè
b. jiáo yōuyòng
b. tǐyúguǎn
b. zuò zuòyè
c. jiào yòuyōng
c. tǐyùguǎn
c. zuò zuǒyè
Listen and complete the sentences. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. Nǐmen zǒude zhème kuài, yào qù nǎr? 2. Yáng Huān dǎ lánqiú dǎde fēicháng hǎo. 3. Zhāng Zhèngrán yóuyǒng yóude tèbié kuài. 4. Wǒ zuótiān wǎnshang shuìjiào shuìde tài wǎn le . 5. Shéi zuò fàn zuòde fēicháng hǎo?
II. Character Exercises 16-4
16-5
Match each Chinese word with its English meaning. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. g 1. 作业
a. slow
d 2. 快
b. exercise
f 3. 体育馆
c. coach
h 4. 游泳池
d. fast
c 5. 教练
e. ball game
a 6. 慢
f. gymnasium
b 7. 锻炼
g. homework
e 8. 球赛
h. swimming pool
Work with a partner. Write the radical and its meaning for each of the following characters. Write at least two other characters with the same radical. (Refer to the list of radicals on page 255 for help.) Example:
快
心/忄 heart
忙 想
1. 游
水/氵 water
泳 池 洗 澡
2. 慢
心/忄 heart
快 忙 想
3. 锻
釒 metal
钱
4. 篮
竹 bamboo
筷
5. 俩
亻 person
做 们 住
6. 赛
贝 shell
买 贵
101
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 16 Hobbies and Sports
III. Grammar Exercises 16-8
Use the prompts in parentheses to create degree of complement sentences with 得. Then check your answers with a partner. Example:
16-9
他说中文 (fast)
他说中文说得很快。/中文他说得很快。
1. 我妈妈做饭 (well)
我妈妈做饭做得很好。
2. 杨欢打篮球 (well)
杨欢打篮球打得很好。
3. 你们做作业 (fast)
你们做作业做得很快。
4. 我锻炼 (little)
我锻炼得很少。
5. 谁包饺子 (slow)
谁包饺子包得很慢？
With a partner, take turns asking and answering questions about the pictures with 得. 1. Q: 游泳游得怎么样？ A: 游泳游得很快。 2. Q: 篮球打得怎么样？ A: 篮球打得很棒。 3. Q: 棒球打得怎么样？ A: 棒球打得很好。 4. Q: 排球打得怎么样？ A: 排球打得非常好。 5. Q: 足球踢得怎么样？ A: 足球踢得很漂亮。 6. Q: 跑步跑得怎么样？ A: 跑步跑得很快。
文化点滴
CULTURE NOTES
Do you know … •
when and how Kung Fu began? Legend has it that Chinese martial arts originated during the reign of the Yellow Emperor 黄帝 around 5,000 years ago as a form of physical training for the military.
•
what some different Kung Fu styles are? It is now commonly classified into several styles: Internal and External, Southern and Northern, Shaolin 少林 派, Wudang 武当派, and Emei 峨嵋派. The famous Shaolin style evolved from the self-defense skills of the monks at the Shaolin Temple of Songshan 嵩山少林寺 which is located on Songshan mountain (嵩山),in the Henan province of Central China.
•
what some famous Kung Fu movies are? Hero (英雄) Crouching Tiger, Hidden Dragon (卧虎藏龙) House of Flying Daggers (十面埋伏) The Game of Death (死亡的游戏) Drunken Master (醉拳) Shaolin Temple (少林寺)
102
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 16 Hobbies and Sports
行动吧！LET’S GO! Answer the following questions with your partner or group. 1. 孙信美和杨欢马拉松跑得怎么样？她们是第几名？ 孙信美和杨欢马拉松跑得很好。杨欢是第三名，孙信美是第八名。 2. 杨欢游泳游得怎么样？孙信美呢？孙信美游得快不快？ 杨欢游泳游得很好，孙信美也游得很好，她游得很快。 3. 杨欢乒乓球打得好不好？孙信美呢？ 杨欢乒乓球打得很好，孙信美也打得很好。 4. 北京大学足球踢得怎么样？北京大学是第几名？ 北京大学足球踢得很好，是第一名。
103
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
第十六课 Lesson 16
Lesson 16 Hobbies and Sports
爱好和运动 Hobbies and Sports
I. Listening Exercises 16-1
Listen to the dialogue. Then choose the best answer for each of the following questions. 爱文﹕信美，你去哪儿？ 信美﹕我去体育馆打篮球。你想一起去吗？ 爱文﹕对不起，我不太会打篮球。 信美﹕你喜欢什么？是游泳吗？ 爱文﹕对，我常常去游泳。你呢？你喜欢游泳吗？ 信美﹕我喜欢游泳，可是我游得不太好。 爱文﹕好，你去打球吧。晚上一起吃饭怎么样？ 信美﹕今天晚上我们要包饺子，你来我们宿舍吧。 爱文﹕太好了，我很喜欢吃饺子，我一定去。 1. Where is she going? a. She is going to a class. b. She is going to play basketball. c. She is going back to her dorm to make dumplings. 2. How well does he play basketball? a. He plays very well. b. He doesn’t play very well. c. He often practices and is improving. 3. Does she like to swim? a. She likes to swim, and swims quite well. b. She likes to swim, but doesn’t swim very well. c. She doesn’t like to swim. 4. What’s their plan for tonight? a. They will go to swim together. b. They will go to basketball together. c. They will have dumplings at her dorm.
16-2
Listen and choose the statement that is correct. 1. 小美做饭做得不慢，可是吃饭吃得很慢。 2. 欢欢常常打篮球，可是打得不太好。 3. 正然写字写得不快，可是作业做得很好。 1. a. 小美做饭做得很慢。 b. 小美吃饭吃得很慢。 2. a. 欢欢篮球打得不太好。 b. 欢欢篮球打得很好。 3. a. 正然作业做得很好。 b. 正然写字写得很快。
104
SAM Answer (Simplified Version) 16-3
Lesson 16 Hobbies and Sports
Listen to the challenge dialogue. Though there may be some words and phrases that are unfamiliar to you, see if you can understand the general meaning by using what you have learned. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. 张正然: 信美，都快要五点了。杨欢怎么还没有来，我们要晚了。电影就要开始了。 孙信美: 没关系，正然。杨欢跑步跑得很快，应该就快到了。你看，杨欢来了！ 杨欢:
对不起，我来晚了。我们的文学课今天很晚下课，四点五十分才下课。
张正然: 杨欢，你跑步跑得真快，五分钟就从学校跑到这里了！ 孙信美: 是啊！杨欢不但跑步跑得快，而且游泳也游得非常好。 杨欢:
没有啦。对了, 我知道你们篮球都打得很不错，我篮球打得不太好, 有时间教我打篮球吧。
张正然: 好呀，看完电影以后， 我们一起去打篮球，怎么样？ 孙信美: 太好了，我们先去打球，然后一起去吃中国菜吧。 杨欢:
16-4
没问题。今天是星期五，我们都应该好好地休息一下！
1. 张正然 and 孙信美 don’t know how to play basketball.
True
False
2. 杨欢 can run very fast.
True
False
3. Today is Friday.
True
False
Listen to the challenge dialogue again and choose the best answer for each of the following questions. 1. What are the three friends going to do at 5:00? a. Dine in a restaurant. b. Watch a movie. c. Play basketball in the stadium. d. Walk to the dorm. 2. How does 杨欢 go to meet 张正然 and 孙信美? a. She drives. b. She takes a bus. c. She runs. d. She rides a bike. 2. Why is 杨欢 almost late? a. She went swimming before coming. b. Her Literature class ended later than usual. c. She went to play basketball before coming. d. She had Chinese food before coming.
II. Character Exercises 16-5
Match each traditional character with its simplified form. f 1. 鍛
a. 篮
a 2. 籃
b. 体
b 3. 體
c. 边
e 4. 圖
d. 厅
c 5. 邊
e. 图
g 6. 業
f. 锻
d 7. 廳
g. 业
105
SAM Answer (Simplified Version) 16-6
Lesson 16 Hobbies and Sports
Write the following Pinyin sentences in Chinese characters. 1. Tā jiāode hěnhǎo. 她教得很好。 2. Wǒ yóuyǒng yóu de hěnkuài. 我游泳游得很快。 3. Nǐ xiànzài yàobuyào gēn wǒmen qù duànliàn? 你现在要不要跟我们去锻炼？ 4. Lánqiú wǒ hái dǎde bú tài hǎo. 篮球我还打得不太好。
III. Grammar Exercises 16-7
Write the following sentences in Chinese, using 得 to describe actions. 1. He came very early. 他来得很早。 2. I often eat very slowly. 我常常吃得很慢。 3. You walk too fast. 你走得太快。 4. He plays basketball very well. 他打篮球打得很好。 5. My roommate goes to bed very late. 我的室友睡得很晚。 6. My mom makes dumplings very fast. 我妈妈包饺子包得很快。
16-8
Rewrite the following sentences so that emphasis is placed on the object of each sentence. 1. 她打篮球打得不错。 篮球她打得不错。 2. 妈妈包饺子包得非常快。 饺子妈妈包得非常快。 3. 谁做饭做得很好？ 饭谁做得很好？ 4. 我睡觉睡得太少。 觉我睡得太少。
IV. Comprehensive Exercises 16-9
Read the following passage and then answer the questions below. 包健和杨中是室友。他们俩都非常喜欢运动，常常一起去健身房锻炼。包健游泳游得很好，他 是学校游泳队的，他也是杨中的游泳教练。杨中游得也不错，可是他不常常游泳。 包健喜欢打篮球，他打得非常好。他也喜欢打排球和乒乓球。排球和乒乓球他都打得不错。 他们俩也喜欢做饭。包健包饺子包得很快，也很好看。杨中做中国菜做得很好吃。他们也常常 请同学们去他们的宿舍吃饭。
106
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 16 Hobbies and Sports
1. 包健和杨中常常去哪儿？ 去健身房锻炼。 2. 包健喜欢打什么球？他打得怎么样？ 篮球。他打得非常好。 3. 杨中常游泳吗？他游得怎么样？ 杨中不常常游泳。他游得不错。 4. 他们俩做饭做得怎么样？ 包健包饺子包得很快，也很好看。杨中做中国菜做得很好吃。 5. 同学们常常去他们宿舍做什么？ 去他们的宿舍吃饭。
107
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
第十七课 Lesson 17
Lesson 17 Weather and Seasons
天气和四季 Weather and Seasons
补充课文
SUPPLEMENTARY PRACTICE
Read the following statements and choose whether they are true or false. 1. 小玲 and 大中 met each other yesterday.
True
False
2. It is currently March.
True
False
3. It snows a lot in 大中’s city.
True
False
4. In 小玲’s city, the summers are not very hot.
True
False
5. 小玲 and 大中 plan to see each other during spring break.
True
False
I. Listening Exercises 17-1
Listen and choose whether the Pinyin is correct (对 [duì]) or incorrect (不对 [búduì]). If it is incorrect, write the correct Pinyin on the line. Then check your answers with a partner or the class.
17-2
1. cūntiān
对 不对 chūntiān
2. shíjiā
对 不对 shíjiān
3. fàngjià
对 不对 _____
4. qìhòu
对 不对 _____
5. jízhōng
对 不对 qízhōng
6. shíhòu
对 不对 _____
7. huáshì
对 不对 _____
8. xiàoyǔ
对 不对 xiàyǔ
Listen and complete the sentences. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. Hěnkuài jiùyào kǎoshì le, wǒ máng jí le. 2. Wǒ hǎojiǔ méiyǒu huíjiā le, fàng chūnjià de shíhou wǒ xiǎng huíjiā kànkan. 3. Běijīng de qìhòu chūn xià qiū dōng dōu yǒu, qízhōng wǒ bǐjiào xǐhuān qiūtiān. 4. Xiānggǎng de xiàtiān hěn cháng, yǒushíhòu fēicháng rè, hái huì guāfēng, xiàyǔ. 5. Chūntiān jiùyào lái le, tiānqì jiùyào nuǎnhuo le.
II. Character Exercises 17-4
17-5
Write the Chinese characters for the following adjectives. Then check your answers with a partner. 1.
warm
暖和
2.
hot
热
3.
cold
冷
4.
long (time)
久
5.
short
短
6.
fast
快
7.
slow
慢
8.
difficult
难
9.
many
多
10.
few
少
11.
big
大
12.
small
小
Work with a partner. Write the radical and its meaning for each of the following characters. Discuss with your partner how the radical relates to the word’s meaning. (Refer to the list of radicals on page 255 for help.) 1. 热
火, fire
108
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version) 2. 冷
冫, ice
3. 雪
雨, rain
4. 冬
冫, ice
5. 暖
日, sun
6. 温
氵, water
Lesson 17 Weather and Seasons
III. Grammar Exercises 17-8
Match the beginning of each sentence to its ending. Then check your answers with a partner. D 1. 天气热极了，
A. 其中我最喜欢红色的那条。
A 2. 这儿的裙子都很好看，
B. 有时候她会请我们去她家吃饭。
E 3. 他们认识的时间很短，
C. 我想坐飞机去中国玩儿。
B 4. 她的中国菜做得很不错，
D. 夏天就要到了。
C 5. 就要放春假了，
E. 才不到一个月。
文化点滴
CULTURE NOTES
Do you know … •
what the three main festivals in China are and when they occur? The three main Chinese festivals are Chinese New Year (春节 [Chūnjié]), the Dragon Boat Festival (端午节 [Duānwǔjié]), and the Mid-Autumn Festival (中秋节 [Zhōngqiūjié]). On the lunar calendar, they are celebrated on January 1, May 5, and August 15, respectively.
•
what “hong bao” (红包[hóngbāo]) are and what they are used for? “Hong bao” is “red envelope” and it stands for good fortune.
•
what some traditional foods are for the three main Chinese holidays? Chinese New Year: New Year cakes (年糕 [niángāo]); Dragon Boat Festival: sticky rice wrapped in bamboo leaves (粽子 [zòngzi); Mid-Autumn Festival: mooncakes (月饼 [yuèbǐng], round-shaped pastries).
趣味中文
FUN WITH CHINESE
2. Which character in 雨过天晴 did you learn in this lesson? Practice using it in a few sentences. 雨 过 天:
下雨 过生日 星期天
行动吧！LET’S GO! Discuss the following questions with a partner or your group. 1. 星期三书文要穿外套吗？ 星期三最高 26 度, 最低 23 度，有点儿热,
书文不用穿外套。
2. 哪天要带雨伞？ 星期五和星期六
109
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 17 Weather and Seasons
3. 哪一天的温度最高？哪一天的温度最低？ 星期五温度最高，星期六的温度最低。 4. 星期五会有大风吗？ 不会
110
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
第十七课 Lesson 17
Lesson 17 Weather and Seasons
天气和四季 Weather and Seasons
I. Listening Exercises 17-1
Listen and choose the sentence that best describes the statement you hear. 1. 冬天就要来了，天气很快就要冷了。 2. 春夏秋冬，她最喜欢秋天。 3. 这儿的夏天常常下雨。 4. 这两天热极了。 5. 放春假的时候，你来我这儿玩玩吧。 1. a. Spring is coming soon, and the weather is getting warm. b. Winter is coming soon, and the weather is getting cold. c. Summer is coming soon, and the weather is getting hot. 2. a. She likes spring the most. b. She likes summer the most. c. She likes fall the most. 3. a. It is not so hot in summer here. b. It is very hot in summer here. c. It rains a lot in summer here. 4. a. It has been cold the past couple of days. b. It rained a lot this week. c. It has been extremely hot the past couple of days. 5. a. I’ll go to your place during spring break. b. Why don’t you come over during spring break? c. Let’s go back home together during summer.
17-2
Listen to the dialogue between 夏华 and 春红. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. 夏华﹕ 嘿，春红。好久不见，你现在怎么样？ 春红﹕ 嘿，夏华，你好。我现在每天都很忙，忙极了。 夏华﹕ 你正在忙什么呢？ 春红﹕ 我这个学期有四门课，功课都非常多。还有，我正在跟朋友练习打篮球，很快就要参加学 校的球赛了。 夏华﹕ 你真忙！可是也应该多休息。我们就要放春假了，你想去哪儿玩儿？ 春红﹕ 我想回家看看爸爸妈妈，在家里休息休息。你呢？ 夏华﹕ 我的好朋友要来看我，我会在这儿。 春红﹕ 太好了，你和你的好朋友就要见面了。 1. 春红这个学期不忙。
True
False
2. 春红就要参加学校的篮球赛了。
True
False
3. 夏华在春假的时候要回家。
True
False
4. 夏华就要和她的好朋友见面了。
True
False
111
SAM Answer (Simplified Version) 17-3
Lesson 17 Weather and Seasons
Listen to the challenge dialogue. Though there may be some words and phrases that are unfamiliar to you, see if you can understand the general meaning by using what you have learned. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. 大中﹕ 今天好冷呀。小玲，你穿得太少了！ 小玲﹕ 是呀，大中，冬天就要到了。我没有冬天的大衣， 所以这个星期六我得去买冬天的大衣了。 大中﹕ 我也想去买衣服，你去的时候，叫上我吧。我们一起去，怎么样？ 小玲﹕ 好的。你十二月放寒假的时候要去哪儿？ 大中﹕ 我要去纽约， 我姐姐那儿。 小玲﹕ 啊，那在纽约你可以吃很多地道的中国菜了。 大中﹕ 是呀，我很高兴。你呢，你寒假要去哪儿？ 小玲﹕ 我要和爸爸妈妈去夏威夷玩儿。 大中﹕ 哇塞！好棒哦！夏威夷应该很暖和吧, 你还可以去那儿游泳呢。 小玲﹕ 对，这个星期六，我要买冬天的大衣，也要买夏天的游泳衣呢。
17-4
1. It’s warm today.
True
False
2. Xiaoling doesn’t have a winter coat.
True
False
3. Dazhong suggests that Xiaoling can swim during her vacation.
True
False
Listen to the challenge dialogue again and choose the best answer for each of the following questions. 1. Where is Dazhong going in the winter break? a. To Hawaii. b. To China. c. To go shopping. d. To New York. 2. When is Xiaoling going to travel with her parents? a. The weekend. b. Winter vacation. c. Summer. d. Spring. 3. Where is Dazhong’s sister living? a. China. b. Hawaii. c. New York. d. In this city.
II. Character Exercises 17-5
Write the Chinese characters for the following English sentences and phrases. 1. Autumn is very warm. 秋天很暖和。 2. Spring break 春假 3. It is rainy sometimes in winter. 冬天有时候会下雨。 4. 100 Fahrenheit 华氏一百度 5. extremely hot 热极了 6. Time flies. 时间过得很快。
112
SAM Answer (Simplified Version) 17-6
Lesson 17 Weather and Seasons
Match the Pinyin with the corresponding Chinese characters. d
1. qìhòu
a. 冬天
a
2. dōngtiān
b. 华氏
c
3. fàngjià
c. 放假
f
4. xiàyǔ
d. 气候
b
5. huáshì
e. 好久
h
6. nuǎnhuo
f. 下雨
j
7. shíjiān
g. 刮风
e
8. hǎojiǔ
h. 暖和
g
9. guāfēng
i. 见面
I
10. jiànmiàn
j. 时间
III. Grammar Exercises 17-7
Rewrite the following sentences to include a pattern from the box. ……的时候
就要/快要……了
其中
1. 我有一辆白色的车。 我就要有一辆白色的车了。 2. 她的弟弟今年十八岁。 她的弟弟今年就要十八岁了。 3. 这个学期我有五门课。 我最喜欢中文课。 这个学期我有五门课，其中我最喜欢中文课。 开车不应该打手机。 开车的时候不应该打手机。 17-8
Unscramble the following sentences by placing the characters in the correct order. 1. 下雪 /这儿的 /冷 /， /常常 /冬天 /非常 这儿的冬天非常冷，常常下雪。 2. 一百度 /， /极了 /会到 /华氏 /夏天 /热 夏天会到华氏一百度，热极了。 3. 气候 /都有 /这儿的 /春夏秋冬 /， /夏天 /喜欢 /我 /最 /其中 这儿的气候春夏秋冬都有，其中我最喜欢夏天。 4. 就要 /了 /来 /春天 /， /放春假 /我们 /了 /也 /快要 春天就要来了，我们也快要放春假了。
113
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
第十八课 Lesson 18 补充词
Lesson 18 Travel and Transportation
旅行和交通 Travel and Transportation
SUPPLEMENTARY VOCABULARY SIMPLIFIED
TRADITIONAL
PINYIN
面包车
麵包車
miànbāochē
(包型车)
(包型車)
(bāoxíngchē)
2.
吉普车
吉普車
3.
跑车
4. 5.
1.
N.
minibus, van
jípǔchē
N.
jeep
跑車
pǎochē
N.
sports car
大货车
大貨車
dàhuòchē
N.
truck
四轮驱动
四輪驅動
sìlúnqūdòng
N.
four-wheel drive
(四轮传动)
(四輪傳動)
(sìlúnchuándòng)
6.
越野车
越野車
yuèyěchē
N.
off-road vehicle
7.
磁浮铁路
磁浮鐵路
cífú tiělù
N.
magnetic railway
8.
天桥
天橋
tiānqiáo
N.
overhead bridge
补充课文
SUPPLEMENTARY PRACTICE
Choose the correct answer for the following questions. 1. Where does 大中 live? a. on campus
b. in an apartment by himself off campus
c. at home with his family
d. with a roommate off campus
2. How does he get to school when the weather is bad? a. by bus
b. by train
c. on foot
d. by bike
3. How do they plan to go from San Francisco to Seattle? a. by plane
b. by car
c. by boat
d. by train
4. Where does he want to go after seeing his family? a. the North
b. the South
c. Canada
d. San Francisco
5. He will ___________ to go to the beach. a. take a flight
b. take the bus
c. rent a car
d. go by boat
I. Listening Exercises 18-1
Listen and complete the sentences with the correct Pinyin. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. Wǒ měitiān zǒulù lái xuéxiào. 2. Chūnjià wǒ yào gēn péngyou kāichē qù wár.
114
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 18 Travel and Transportation
3. Wǒmen xià yǔ xià xuě de shíhou zuò gōnggòng qìchē qù xuéxiào. 4. Dào xībù qù kěyi kàndào hěnduō fēngjǐng. 5. Wǒ tèbié xǐhuān hǎibiān de fēngjǐng.
II. Character Exercises 18-3
Work with a partner. Write the radical and its meaning for the following characters. Discuss how the radical relates to the meaning of the character. (Refer to the list of radicals on page 255 for help.)
18-4
1. 海
水, water
2. 远
辵, motion
3. 骑
马, horse
4. 路
足, foot
5. 船
舟, boat
Write the Chinese characters for the following phrases. Then check your answers with a partner. 1.
zhù zài xiào wài
住在校外
2.
zū yíliàng chē
租一辆车
3.
zuò fēijī
坐飞机
4.
qí zìxíngchē
骑自行车
5.
zuò chuán qù wán
坐船去玩
6.
xībù fēngjǐng
西部风景
7.
lí xuéxiào hěnjìn
离学校很近
8.
kāichē lǚxíng
开车旅行
9.
hǎibiān jǐngsè
海边景色
10.
zuò huǒchē
坐火车
III. Grammar Exercises 18-7
With a partner, complete the dialogues with 坐, 开, 骑, or 租. 1. A: 你每天怎么来学校？ B: 我每天
坐
公共汽车来学校。
2. A: 你
开
车
开
得快吗？
B: 我
开
车
开
得不太快！
3. A: 他会不会
骑
自行车？
B: 会。 他
骑
得很好。
4. A: 你觉得
坐
火车怎么样？
B:
坐
火车比较慢，可是很舒服。
5. A: 我们可以用你的车吗？ B: 我的车太小了。你们应该
文化点滴
租
一辆面包车，
CULTURE NOTES
Do you know … •
how common train or boat travel is in China? Traveling by train and by boat are quite popular and have historical traditions.
•
what the longest river in China is? The Yangtze River.
115
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version) •
Lesson 18 Travel and Transportation
what some popular train trips or boat trips are in China? One popular train trip for tourists is traveling along the historic Silk Road in northern China. Popular boat trips are the Yangtze River cruise, the Li River cruise, and traveling the Grand Canal from Hangzhou to Suzhou on a tourist boat.
行动吧！LET’S GO! Answer the following questions with your partner or group. 1. 去天津要坐几点的火车？在几楼等？ 17:50
二楼
2. 想去齐齐哈尔的人应该坐哪个火车？什么车次？ T47 3. 可以从这儿到哈尔滨吗？什么车次？ 可以,
Z23
4. 正明要去烟台。现在是四点。他会不会等很久？他要等多久？ 正明不会等很久, 他要等 36 分钟
116
Review Answer
Lesson 15 to Lesson 18
复习 Review Lesson 15 to Lesson 18
II. Writing and Character Review 1. Radical practice game. Form groups of three or four. Write the following radicals on separate squares of paper. 人 (亻)
日
广
辵 (辶)
水 (氵)
Turn all the squares over so that the blank sides face up. As you take turns, flip over one of the paper squares and say a character you have learned that has the same radical in it. Write the character on a piece of paper so the group can keep track of which characters have already been said. (Once a character has been said, it cannot be used again.) Keep playing until you have come up with as many characters as you can think of. Then compare your group’s list with other groups. Did you find all the same characters for the radicals? Key: 人 (亻): 假 候 俩 作 日: 昨 时 春 暖 广: 厨 厅 度 辵 (辶): 远 近 边 水 (氵): 洗 澡 游 泳 池 汽 海
117
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
第十八课 Lesson 18
Lesson 18 Travel and Transportation
旅行和交通 Travel and Transportation
I. Listening Exercises 18-1
Listen to the dialogue. Then choose the best answer for each of the following questions. A: 就要放春假了，春假的时候你要去哪儿？ B: 我要去纽约，我有一个好朋友在那儿。 A: 你要开车去还是坐飞机去？ B: 我要坐飞机去。我和我的好朋友要先在纽约玩两天, 然后我们一起租车去加拿大玩儿。 A: 我也很喜欢开车旅行，路上可以看很多风景。 B: 你呢？ 你春假要去哪儿？ A: 我要去南部看我妹妹，她在佛罗里达。 B: 佛罗里达很不错。你可以去海边玩儿。那儿的海边景色很美。 A: 是呀，我和我妹妹会去海边玩儿，我们都很喜欢去海边游泳。 1. What will he do during spring break? a. He will stay here. b. He will go back home. c. He will visit a friend. d. He will go to the South. 2. Who will he spend the spring break with? a. His family. b. His friend who lives in New York. c. His friend who lives in Canada. d. His sister. 3. What means of transportation will he use? a. He will drive his brother’s car. b. He will take an airplane and train. c. He will take a train and rent a car. d. He will take an airplane and rent a car. 4. Where will she go during spring break? a. She will stay here. b. She will go home. c. She will visit her sister in the South. d. She will visit her sister in Canada. 5. Where did he recommend that she go? a. To New York. b. To the beach. c. To a swimming pool. d. To Canada.
118
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
18-2
Lesson 18 Travel and Transportation
Listen to the questions and then give answers based on your own situation. 1. 你住在学校的宿舍还是住在校外？ 2. 你每天怎么来学校？ 3. 今年暑假你想做什么？ 4. 你怎么去呢？是坐飞机去还是坐火车去？ 5. 你喜欢海边的景色吗？
18-3
Listen to the challenge dialogue. Though there may be some words and phrases that are unfamiliar to you, see if you can understand the general meaning by using what you have learned. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. A: 文芳，是你呀，你每天都坐公共汽车去学校吗？ B: 是呀，你呢？你每天是怎么去学校的呢？ A: 我骑车，可是今天我朋友借了我的自行车，我只好坐公共汽车了。 B: 你每天骑车去学校，要骑多长时间？ A: 只要二十分钟。骑车可以锻炼锻炼。 B: 下雪的时候你也骑车吗？ A: 下雪的时候不骑，我坐公共汽车。我的同屋有车，有时候我也坐他的车去学校。 B: 对了，春假你要去哪儿？ A: 我要和几个朋友坐火车去西部玩儿。你呢？ B: 我要回家，我想去看看爸爸妈妈和朋友。
18-4
1. It usually takes him an hour to get to school by bike.
True
False
2. He thinks it is good exercise riding his bike to school.
True
False
3. She will go to Shanghai to visit friends during spring break.
True
False
Listen to the challenge dialogue again and choose the best answer for each of the following questions. 1. How often does she take the bus to school? a. Every day. b. Never. c. Three days a week. d. Every Monday. 2. Why did he take the bus to school today? a. His car is not working. b. His bike is broken. c. His friend borrowed his bike. d. It is snowing today. 3. How does he go to school on snowy days? a. By bike. b. He walks. c. He borrows his friend’s car. d. By bus.
119
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 18 Travel and Transportation
II. Character Exercises 18-5
Write the following Pinyin sentences in Chinese characters. 1. Wǒ jiā lí xuéxiào bù yuǎn, zǒulù zhǐyào shí fēnzhōng. 我家离学校不远，走路只要十分钟。 2. Tā yǒushíhou zuò gōnggòng qìchē lái xuéxiào. 他有时候坐公共汽车来学校。 3. Wǒ cháng qí zìxíngchē, kěyǐ duànlian duànlian. 我常骑自行车，可以锻炼锻炼。 4. Nǐmen zěnme qù lǚxíng? Zuò huǒchē, zuò chuán, kāichē, háishì zuò fēijī? 你们怎么去旅行？坐火车、坐船、开车，还是坐飞机？
18-6
Match each traditional character with its simplified form. b 1. 離
a. 骑
e 2. 車
b. 离
a 3. 騎
c. 听
f 4. 風
d. 钟
c 5. 聽
e. 车
g 6. 邊
f. 风
d 7. 鐘
g. 边
III. Grammar Exercises 18-7
The following are things 文健 is going to do on different days this week. Decide what order 文健 will do each activity and write a sentence using 先, 再, and 然后 to describe the order of events. 1. 星期一﹕吃早饭
18-8
上课
游泳
2. 星期二﹕去图书馆
做功课
3. 星期四﹕看朋友
打电话给朋友
4. 星期五﹕上网
去图书馆
去买东西
Complete the following sentences with a verb phrase based on the artwork clues. 1. 从美国去中国，你得坐飞机。 2. 春假她要坐火车回家看爸爸妈妈。 3. A: 我们怎么去这个饭馆？ B: 我们坐公共汽车去。 4. A: 你会骑自行车吗？ B: 不会。我会开车。
120
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 18 Travel and Transportation
IV. Comprehensive Exercises 18-9
Translate the following sentences into Chinese. 1. Does your younger sister live off campus? Is it far from her school? 你妹妹住在校外吗？离学校远不远？ 2. I usually ride a bike to campus. When it’s raining or snowing, I’ll walk. 我常常骑车去学校。下雨下雪的时候，我走路去学校。 3. We want to travel to the West by train. We can look at the scenery on the way. 我想坐火车去西部旅行。我们路上可以看看风景。 4. I’ve heard that the shore is beautiful in the South. I would like to go there to swim. 我听说南部的海边景色很美。我想去那儿游泳。
121
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
第十九课 Lesson 19 补充课文
Lesson 19 Health and Medicine
健康和医药 Health and Medicine SUPPLEMENTARY PRACTICE
Write the answers to the following questions in Chinese. 1. 欧阳迎怎么了？
她感冒了。
2. 她吃中饭了没有？
她没有吃中饭。
3. 这个学期她有几门课？
这个学期她有六门课。
4. 她看医生了没有？
她前天看医生了。
5. 她吃药了没有？
她吃了点儿药。
I. Listening Exercises 19-1
Listen and choose whether the Pinyin is correct (对 [duì]) or incorrect (不对 [búduì]). If it is incorrect, write the correct Pinyin on the line. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. gǎngmào
对 不对 gǎnmào
2. shūfù
对 不对 shūfu
3. tóuténg
对 不对 __________
4. késuò
对 不对 késòu
5. kǒushì
对 不对 kǎoshì
6. shēngbìn
对 不对 shēngbìng
7. zhǔnbèi
对 不对 __________
8. yìshēng
对 不对 yīshēng
II. Character Exercises 19-3
19-4
Match each Chinese word with its English meaning. Then check your answers with a partner. e 1. 感谢
a. to catch a cold
a 2. 感冒
b. comfortable
b 3. 舒服
c. to review
c 4. 复习
d. exam
f 5. 咳嗽
e. to be grateful
d 6. 考试
f. to cough
Work with a partner. Write the radical and its meaning for each of the following characters. Write other characters you have learned with the same radical. (Refer to the list of radicals on page 255 for help.) 1. 咳
口, mouth
2. 药
艹, grass
3. 饿
食, food
4. 笔
竹, bamboo
5. 病
疒, sick
III. Grammar Exercises 19-7
Complete the sentences with 的, 得, or 地. Then check your answers with a partner. 1. 那个穿红色裙子 2. 他很快 3. 这个公园
地
的
人是我妹妹。
吃了饭。 的
景色很美。
122
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version) 4. 我的德文说
得
不好。
5. 考试以后我要好好
地
6. 小文走路走
很慢。
文化点滴
得
Lesson 19 Health and Medicine
玩玩。
CULTURE NOTES
Do you know … •
what is believed to happen when the balance of yin and yang in the human body is disrupted? A person falls sick when the balance is disrupted.
•
what some common Chinese medicine treatments are? acupuncture 针灸, moxibustion, cupping 拔罐, tuina 推拿 (a form of Chinese acupressure massage), and herbal medicine
•
what some ways to maintain health in daily habits are? Eating the type of diet that best fits their body conditions, and doing exercises such as 气功 (qigong) or 太 极拳 (tai chi).
趣味中文
FUN WITH CHINESE
2. Which character in 良药苦口，忠言逆耳 did you learn in this lesson? Practice using it in a sentence. 药﹕我看医生了，也吃药了。
123
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
第十九课 Lesson 19
Lesson 19 Health and Medicine
健康和医药 Health and Medicine
I. Listening Exercises 19-1
Listen to the dialogue between 黄飞 and 白雪. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. 黄飞﹕ 白雪，你来美国几个月了？ 白雪﹕ 我来美国半年了。 黄飞﹕ 你觉得这儿的生活怎么样？吃得还好吗？ 白雪﹕ 我来这儿的第一个月不喜欢吃美国菜，很想吃中国菜。我吃得很少，休息得也不好，后来 生病了。 黄飞﹕ 是吗？那你看医生了没有？ 白雪﹕ 看了。我吃了医生给我的药以后，好好地休息，后来病很快就好了。现在我常常锻炼身体， 吃饭吃得很多，再也没有生病了。 黄飞﹕ 太好了！那你现在喜欢吃美国菜了吗？ 白雪﹕ 我现在喜欢吃美国菜了。我还会做很多美国菜了呢！
19-2
1. 白雪来美国三个月了。
True
False
2. 白雪刚来美国的时候喜欢吃美国菜。
True
False
3. 白雪生病以后去看医生了。
True
False
4. 白雪现在没有生病了。
True
False
5. 白雪现在不喜欢吃美国菜了。
True
False
6. 白雪现在还不会做美国菜。
True
False
Listen to the dialogue. Then choose the best answer for each of the following questions. 田小西﹕ 嘿！小东。好久不见，你好吗？ 程小东﹕ 嘿！小西，是你呀！你现在去哪儿呢？ 田小西﹕ 我要坐公共汽车去学校。 程小东﹕ 我现在也要去学校。对了，我会开车了，上个月还买了一辆车。我开车带你去学校吧。 田小西﹕ 太好了！从这里开车去学校要多长时间？ 程小东﹕ 要十分钟。车很少的时候只要五分钟就到学校了。 田小西﹕ 开车真快！公共汽车开得很慢，要半个小时才能到学校！我也应该好好地学开车！ 1. Where are they going? a. They are going to her place. b. They are going to his dorm. c. They are going to school. d. They are going to the library. 2. How was she originally planning to go? a. She was going to ride her bicycle. b. She was going to take a bus. c. She was going to get a ride with someone. d. She was going to walk.
124
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 19 Health and Medicine
3. When did he buy his car? a. Today. b. Yesterday. c. Last week. d. Last month. 4. How long does it take to go to school by bus? a. An hour. b. Half an hour. c. Ten minutes. d. Five minutes. 19-3
Listen to the challenge dialogue. Though there may be some words and phrases that are unfamiliar to you, see if you can understand the general meaning by using what you have learned. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. 妈妈﹕儿子，七点了，快起床了！ 儿子﹕哦，七点了， 妈，我不太舒服。 妈妈﹕唉呀，有点烫，你好象发烧了！要不要去看医生？ 儿子﹕不行啊，我上午有考试，考完了以后再说吧。 妈妈﹕那就先吃点药，多喝水。 儿子﹕好吧，家里有药吗？ 妈妈﹕有，我去拿！ 妈妈﹕来，吃药！考完试以后我去接你，我和你一起去看医生。 儿子﹕好的。
19-4
1. They will go to see the doctor together.
True
False
2. He has a bad stomach ache.
True
False
3. She gave him some medicine.
True
False
Listen to the challenge dialogue again and choose the best answer for each of the following questions. 1. What is the time? a. 6:00 A.M. b. 7:00 A.M. c. 7:30 A.M. d. 8:00 A.M. 2. What is the relationship between the two people? a. Roommates. b. Friends. c. Boyfriend and girlfriend. d. Mother and son. 3. Will he go to see the doctor today? a. Yes. He will go after he gets up. b. Yes. He will go after he finishes his test. c. No. He cannot go because he has a test today. d. No. He will just take some over-the-counter medicine.
125
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 19 Health and Medicine
II. Character Exercises 19-5
19-6
Write the Chinese characters for the following Pinyin. 1. hǎoxiàng 好象
2. gǎnmào 感冒
3. bǐjì 笔记
4. fùxí 复习
5. shūfu 舒服
6. zhǔnbèi 准备
7. gǎnxiè 感谢
8. kǎoshì 考试
9. suǒyǐ 所以
10. yīshēng 医生
11. chīyào 吃药
12. fāshāo 发烧
Choose the correct traditional form for each of the following characters. a. 視 b. 開 c. 頭 1. 头 2. 发
a. 條
b. 雙
c. 發
3. 药
a. 樣
b. 藥
c. 樂
4. 笔
a. 業
b. 醫
c. 筆
5. 备
a. 備
b. 準
c. 電
6. 医
a. 網
b. 醫
c. 習
7. 饿
a. 餓
b. 館
c. 飯
III. Grammar Exercises 19-7
For the following sentences, first change the sentence into a question. Then give a negative answer to the question. 1. 这个夏天我就要去北京学中文了。 Question: 这个夏天你就要去北京学中文了吗？ Negative answer: 这个夏天我不去北京学中文。 2. 她做了两个蛋糕。 Question: 她做了两个蛋糕吗？ Negative answer: 她没有做两个蛋糕。 3. 我下了课以后，就去图书馆看书。 Question: 你下了课以后，就去图书馆看书吗？ Negative answer: 我下了课以后，不去图书馆看书。 4. 昨天我在我朋友家喝了很多酒。 Question: 昨天你在你朋友家喝了很多酒吗？ Negative answer: 昨天我没有在我朋友家喝很多酒。
19-8
Unscramble the following sentences by placing the characters in the correct order. 1. 我 /还 /吃饭 /呢 /没有 我还没有吃饭呢。 2. 你 /没有 /了 /吃药 你吃药了没有？ 3. 我 /看 /去 /医生 /了 我去看医生了。 4. 你 /在家 /应该 /休息 /地 /好好 你应该在家好好地休息。
126
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 19 Health and Medicine
5. 我 /考试 /准备 /地 /好好 /得 我得好好地准备考试。
IV. Comprehensive Exercises 19-9
Translate the following sentences into Chinese. 1. I bought that red skirt tonight. 我今天晚上买了那条红裙子。 2. Let’s go swimming together after you recover from your illness. 等你的病好了以后我们一起去游泳。 3. I haven’t eaten at all today, so I feel very hungry now. 我一天没有吃饭了。所以，我现在觉得很饿。 4. He has read three Chinese books. 他看了三本中文书了。 5. I traveled to the West during spring break. 我春假的时候去了西部旅行。
127
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 20 Renting an Apartment
第二十课 Lesson 20
看房和租房 Renting an Apartment
补充课文
SUPPLEMENTARY PRACTICE
Read the following statements and choose whether they are true or false. 1. The writer went to 常天’s apartment today.
True
False
2. The writer is good at cooking and cooks at his dorm frequently.
True
False
3. The apartment building does not allow pets.
True
False
4. The rent has to be paid on the 5th of every month.
True
False
5. The writer will call the landlord tomorrow.
True
False
I. Listening Exercises 20-1
Listen and complete the sentences with the correct Pinyin. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. Wàimiàn
xiàyǔ le, wǒmen jìnqù ba!
2. Wǒ huílái le, wǒ yě bǎ wǎnfàn dài huílái le. 3. Wǒ zhèngzài zuòfàn ne, hěn hǎochī, nǐmen guòlái chángchang ba! 4. Wǒmen děi zài měige yuè de dìyītiān fù fángzū.
II. Character Exercises 20-3
20-4
Choose the correct meaning for the following words. Then check your answers with a partner. 1. 带来
a. to come over
b. to come in
c. to bring over
2. 马上
a. upstairs
b. immediately
c. downstairs
3. 必须
a. should
b. but
c. must
4. 搬
a. to move
b. to enter
c. to pay
5. 付
a. to move
b. to enter
c. to pay
Write the radical for each of the following characters. Check your answers with a partner and discuss other words you have learned with the same radicals. 1. 把 手 2. 进 辵 3. 搬 手 4. 来 人 5. 过 辵
III. Grammar Exercises 20-7
With a partner, complete the dialogues with either 来 or 去. 1. 小花﹕ 明明，这就是我的宿舍，外面有点儿冷，我们进__去__吧！ 小雪，我回_来_了，我也把明明带_来_了。 2. 小雪﹕ 我在楼上，我正在看电影呢，你们一起上_来_看看吧！
128
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 20 Renting an Apartment
3. 明明﹕ 我们等一下再上_去_。 对了，小花，我把你要的书也带_来_了。 4. 小花﹕ 太好了，谢谢。 小雪，我们都在楼下，请你下_来_，好吗？ 5. 小雪﹕ 好，我马上下_去_。 20-8
With a partner, complete the sentences with 把, directional complements, and the prompts in parentheses. 1. 昨天我的好朋友要从纽约过来看我，昨天下课以后，我从教室走出来以后，就回宿舍去了。 2. 我要开门进去的时候，我的钥匙不见了，所以我跑回教室去。 3. 我跑进去以后，把桌子搬过来，搬过去。 4. 我也把书拿起来看看，还是没找到。 5. 我累地坐下去，就发现了钥匙在椅子上！
文化点滴
CULTURE NOTES
Do you know … •
what some traditional housing styles in China are? The Si He Yuan (四合院) in the north, earthen round houses (土楼) in Fujian (福建 [Fújiàn]); houses built along canals in Suzhou (苏州) , and the special roof scaffolding style that functions as fire-proofing in houses in Anhui (安徽).
•
which direction early houses usually faced? South.
•
if many people still live in traditional-style houses? No.
行动吧！LET’S GO! Answer the following questions with a partner or your group. 1. 房间是在几楼？从一楼到房间，是要上去还是下去？ 3 楼，要上去 2. 什么时候可以搬进去？ 可以马上搬过来 3. 每个月的房租是多少？还有什么是应该付的？ 月租 6000 元，不包括网络，瓦斯，水，电。 4. 住这个房间的人能不能把狗带回家？ 不能 5. 附近有什么？ 学校，超市和公园
129
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
第二十课 Lesson 20
Lesson 20 Renting an Apartment
看房和租房 Renting an Apartment
I. Listening Exercises 20-1
Listen and choose the correct English meaning for each statement you hear. 1. 我想搬出去住。 2. 我把我女朋友带来了。 3. 每个月的第一天必须付房租。 4. 请你马上下来。 1. a. I want to move in. b. I want to move out. c. I want you to move in. d. I want you to move out. 2. a. I brought my girlfriend over. b. I went out with my girlfriend. c. I went to see my girlfriend. d. I moved in with my girlfriend. 3. a. The rent has to be paid on the first day each month. b. The rent has to be paid in the first month every year. c. The rent has to be paid at the end of each month. d. The rent has to be paid on the first Monday of each month. 4. a. Please come over here right now. b. Please leave now. c. Please move in now. d. Please come down right now.
20-2
Listen to the dialogue between 小明 and 小谢。Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. 小明﹕ 小谢，这就是我的公寓，外面有点儿冷，我们进去吧！ 小谢﹕ 你们的公寓很大，很不错。这是谁的电视？ 小明﹕ 这是我室友的电视，他上个星期把他家的电视搬过来了。 小谢﹕ 很好。噢, 对了，小明, 我把你要的中文书带过来了。 小明﹕ 谢谢。噢, 今天是一号，我得把这个月的房租拿去给房东太太。你请坐，我出去一下，房 东太太住在楼上，我跑上去，马上下来。 1. 那是小明的公寓，他们先在外面，然后进去。
True
False
2. 那是小明的电视，他从家里搬过来的。
True
False
3. 小谢把房租带来了。
True
False
4. 房东太太住在楼上。
True
False
5. 小明上楼去把中文书给房东太太。
True
False
130
SAM Answer (Simplified Version) 20-3
Lesson 20 Renting an Apartment
Listen to the challenge dialogue. Though there may be some words and phrases that are unfamiliar to you, see if you can understand the general meaning by using what you have learned. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. 夏琳﹕ 常先生，您好！我是夏琳。 常风﹕ 你好！我们通过电话。 夏琳﹕ 对，在电话里您说想租一个一室一厅的公寓，是吗？ 常风﹕ 是的，我在大学工作，想住在学校附近。 夏琳﹕ 我这儿有一个一室一厅的公寓，离学校很近，走路只要十分钟。您想看看吗？ 常风﹕ 好啊，房租多少钱？ 夏琳﹕ 每个月四百元。 常风﹕ 我们现在可以去看看吗？ 夏琳﹕ 可以，我们走吧。 夏琳﹕ 这是卧室，这是客厅，这是洗手间。这儿的对面是一个公园，也离学校很近，附近还有公 共汽车站。很方便。 常风﹕ 很好。什幺时候可以搬进来？ 夏琳﹕ 马上就可以。 常风﹕ 好，这房子我要了。
20-4
1. He wants to find a place close to where he works.
True
False
2. The place is close to a park.
True
False
3. The conversation is between a boss and an employee.
True
False
Listen to the challenge dialogue again and choose the best answer for each of the following questions. 1. What kind of place is he looking for? a. A two-bedroom apartment. b. A dorm room on campus. c. A place close to the park. d. An apartment close to campus. 2. Where does he work? a. In a university. b. In a park. c. At a real-estate company. d. At a telephone company. 3. How much is the monthly rent? a. $300 b. $400 c. $500 d. $540 4. When can he move in? a. Next week. b. In two days. c. Anytime. d. Next month.
131
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 20 Renting an Apartment
II. Character Exercises 20-5
Write the following Pinyin sentences in Chinese characters. 1. Wǒ bǎ wǒ péngyou dàilái le. 我把我朋友带来了。 2. Yǒu yíge rén bān chūqù le. 有一个人搬出去了。 3. Nǐ yàobuyào bān jìnlái? 你要不要搬进来？ 4. Qǐng nǐ bāng wǒ bǎ zhuōzi bān shàngqu. 请你帮我把桌子搬上去。 5. Wǒ bǎ wǒde gǒu gěi wǒ nǚpéngyou le. 我把我的狗给我女朋友了。 6. Wǒ mǎshàng xiàqu. 我马上下去。
20-6
Match each traditional character with its simplified form. c 1. 須
a. 过
a 2. 過
b. 马
f 3. 樓
c. 须
e 4. 來
d. 饭
b 5. 馬
e. 来
g 6. 進
f. 楼
d 7. 飯
g. 进
III. Grammar Exercises 20-7
明学’s Mom is coming to visit him the day after tomorrow. Use 把 and a directional complement to fill in the blanks in their phone conversation below. (Clues are given in parentheses.) 1. 明学﹕ 喂，是妈妈吗？我是明学。你后天 把 我的车 开过来 的时候 (when you drive my car over)，也 把 我的电脑_搬过来_ (move my computer over)，好吗？ 2. 妈妈﹕ 可以，要不要也 把 你的夏天衣服 带过去
(bring your summer clothes over) 呢？
3. 明学﹕ 也好，一定要 把 那件黄衬衫 带过来 (bring it over)，我很喜欢那件。 4. 妈妈﹕ 没问题。噢！对了，爸爸给你买了一个新手机。 明学﹕ 太好了！请 把 那个新手机也 带过来 (bring it over) 给我吧！ 5. 妈妈﹕ 我今天做了饺子，要不要也 带 一些 过去 (bring some over) 呢？ 6. 明学﹕ 太好了，我的室友要 搬出去 了 (move out)，他很喜欢吃饺子，你多拿一些 过来
(take
some over) 请他吃。 7. 妈妈﹕ 那我就多 拿 一些 过去
(take some over)。
明学﹕ 妈，我很累！我想再回 去 (go back)睡觉。 8. 妈妈﹕ 你昨天晚上是什幺时候从学校回 去 (go back)的？ 明学﹕ 我没有车，我是 走回来 的 (walk back)，十一点半才 回来
132
(come back)。再见！
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
20-8
Lesson 20 Renting an Apartment
Answer the following questions about the dialogue above, using 把 and directional complements. 1. 明学的妈妈什幺时候过去看他？ 后天 2. 妈妈要带什幺过去？ 电脑，明学的夏天衣服，新手机，饺子 3. 明学要妈妈把黄衬衫怎幺样? 明学要妈妈把那件黄衬衫带过来。 4. 新手机是谁买的？要怎幺处理呢？ 新手机是明学的爸爸买的，明学要妈妈把那个新手机也带过来给他。 5. 明学昨天晚上是什幺时候回去的？ 昨天晚上十一点半
133
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 21 Future Plans
第二十一课 未来计划 Lesson 21 Future Plans 补充课文
SUPPLEMENTARY PRACTICE
Choose the correct answer for the following questions. 1. 秋雨毕业以后想做什么？ a. 她想去找工作。
b. 她要去公司实习。
c. 她可能会申请研究生院。
d. 她会去参加暑期班学习。
2. 海华什么时候毕业？ a. 明年
b. 今年
c. 一年以后
d. 两年以后
3. 海华毕业以后想做什么？ a. 找工作
b. 去电脑公司实习
c. 去上海
d. 学中文
4. 秋雨今年暑假要做什么？ a. 去北京
b. 参加暑期班
c. 找工作
d. 多学一点儿法文
5. 秋雨什么时候去中国？ a. 明年
b. 两年后
c. 两天后
d. 下个星期
I. Listening Exercises 12-1
Listen and write the Pinyin for the words you hear. 1. Bìyè yǐhòu nǐ xiǎng zuò shénme? 2. Wǒ yàoqù dǎgōng. Shì yìjiā diànnǎo gōngsī. 3. Wǒ háiyǒu liǎngnián cái bìyè ne. 4. Nǐ yào cháng gěi wǒ xiě diànzǐ yóujiàn.
II. Character Exercises 12-3
Choose the correct meaning for the following words. Then check your answers with a partner. 1. 暑期 a. summer
b. summer vacation
c. to study abroad
b. summer vacation
c. to study abroad
b. internship
c. company
b. to decide
c. to graduate
b. to study abroad
c. to apply
2. 暑假 a. summer intern 3. 实习 a. to study abroad 4. 毕业 a. internship 5. 留学 a. overseas
134
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 21 Future Plans
6. 申请 a. to apply 21-4
b. to study abroad
c. to decide
Write the radical for each of the following characters. Check your answers with a partner and discuss how the radical relates to the meaning of the word and any other characters you have learned with the same radical. 1. 暑:
日 sun
2. 找:
手 hand
3. 意:
心 heart
4. 愉:
心 heart
5. 电:
雨 rain
6. 研:
石 stone
文化点滴
CULTURE NOTES
Do you know … •
what students in China usually do during summer vacation? Many high school students participate in summer classes to help prepare for future college exams and to build their academic competitiveness. College students take classes not only to help prepare academically, but also to learn life-skills such as sewing, cooking or driving, as well as music, art, and foreign languages. Many college students also look for part-time work or internships. Other students may take time to volunteer to help rural communities. Summer is also a good time to study abroad.
•
what kinds of classes you can take when studying abroad in China? In addition to language and culture classes, there are classes to study Chinese medicine, Chinese martial arts, Chinese calligraphy, and Chinese traditional arts and music.
行动吧！LET’S GO! Answer the following questions with your partner or group. 1. 文中是哪国人？ 法国人 2. 他大学毕业了吗？ 还没毕业 3. 他的专业是什么？你觉得他毕业以后会想做什么？ 工程，工程师 4. 你觉得他想一面学中文，一面做什么？ 参加活动﹕打太极拳
135
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 21 Future Plans
第二十一课 未来计划 Lesson 21 Future Plans I. Listening Exercises 21-1
Listen to the questions. Then write your answers in Chinese characters. 1. 你常一面上网一面吃饭，是不是？ 2. 你做第十九课的作业了没有？ 3. 昨天晚上十一点的时候，你正在做什么？ 4. 今年夏天你就要去中国了，对不对？
21-2
Listen to the challenge dialogue. Though there may be some words and phrases that are unfamiliar to you, see if you can understand the general meaning by using what you have learned. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. A﹕你什么时候去中国？ B﹕下星期一。你呢，暑假做什么？ A﹕我会先在这儿住六个星期，上两门课。然后和几个朋友去南部玩玩。 B﹕去南部玩？你们打算去哪儿玩？佛罗里达还是墨西哥？ A﹕我们要去佛罗里达。我们想开车去，一路上慢慢玩。我哥哥在佛罗里达，我们可以住他那儿。 B﹕有地方住，那可真不错。 A﹕对了，你去中国是玩儿还是实习？ B﹕都是，我会先去北京的 IBM 电脑公司实习两个月，然后去上海看朋友。 A﹕那祝你一路顺风！ B﹕谢谢！
21-3
1. He will travel with some friends this summer.
True
False
2. She will do a summer internship with a company in Beijing.
True
False
3. She will visit her friends in China.
True
False
Listen to the challenge dialogue again and choose the best answer for each of the following questions. 1. Where will she go this summer? a. Mexico. b. Europe. c. China. d. Home. 2. When will she leave? a. Tomorrow. b. Next month. c. Next Monday. d. In two days. 3. What will he do this summer? a. He will go home. b. He will take some classes then go to the South. c. He will stay here. d. He will go to China.
136
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 21 Future Plans
II. Character Exercises 21-4
Use the given character to write a word or phrase that uses the same character. Example:
21-5
校
学校
1. 意 有意思
6. 假 春假
2. 愉 愉快
7. 定 一定
3. 平 平安
8. 留 留学
4. 运 好运
9. 打 打工
5. 实 实习
10. 申 申请
Match the Chinese characters with the corresponding Pinyin. b 1. 找
a. kě
e 2. 暑
b. zhǎo
g 3. 研
c. diàn
a 4. 可
d. bān
c 5. 电
e. shǔ
d 6. 班
f. jué
h 7. 业
g. yán
f 8. 决
h. yè
III.
Grammar Exercises
21-7
Choose the correct Chinese translation for each question or statement below. 1. Are you going to China soon? a. 你去中国了吗？ b. 你去中国了没有？ c. 你就要去中国了吗？ 2. Have you taken the exam? a. 你参加考试了呢？ b. 你参加考试了吗？ c. 你开始考试了吗？ 3. He is drinking coffee. a. 他喝了咖啡。 b. 他喝咖啡了没有。 c. 他正在喝咖啡呢。 4. I haven’t gone to see doctor yet. a. 我还没有去看医生呢。 b. 我去看了医生。 c. 我就要去看医生了。
137
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 22 Arts and Culture
第二十二课 艺术和文化 Lesson 22 Arts and Culture 补充课文
SUPPLEMENTARY PRACTICE
Write the answers to the following questions in Chinese. 1. 秋雨在上海怎么样？
秋雨很忙，每天都有很多课，功课也不少。
2. 秋雨的老师怎么样？
老师很不错，教得很认真。
3. 秋雨觉得上海怎么样？
上海非常漂亮，很有意思，有很多好吃的东西。
4. 在上海秋雨最喜欢吃什么？
秋雨最喜欢吃小笼包。
5. 海华的同事们怎么样？
同事们都很好，也很热心。
I. Listening Exercises 22-1
Listen and write down the short dialogues you hear in Pinyin. 1. Nǐ juéde Shànghǎi zhège chéngshì zěnmeyàng? Wǒ juéde Shànghǎi hěn měilì. 2. Nǐ wèishénme yìzhí méiyou gěi wǒ xiě xìn? Duìbuqǐ, wǒ tài máng le, méiyou shíjiān xiě xìn. 3. Nǐ zuì xǐhuān chī shénme? Wǒ zuì xǐhuān chī Shànghǎide xiǎolóngbāo. 4. Nǐ kāishǐ shíxí le ma? Yǐjing kāishǐ le. Gōngsī lǐ de tóngshìmen dōu hěn hǎo.
II. Character Exercises 22-3
22-4
Match each Chinese word with its English meaning. Then check your answers with a partner. e 1. 热心
a. to start
f 2. 开心
b. thing
h 3. 认真
c. already
a 4. 开始
d. Peking Opera
g 5. 活动
e. warm-hearted
b 6. 东西
f. happy
d 7. 京剧
g. activity
c 8. 已经
h. conscientious
Write the radical for each of the following characters. Then write another character with the same radical for each. Check your answers with a partner. 1. 认
言，words
2. 城
土，earth
3. 热
火，fire
4. 尝
口，mouth
5. 板
门，door
6. 活
水，water
138
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 22 Arts and Culture
III. Grammar Exercises 22-6
Connect the following sentences with 因为……所以…… [yīnwèi…suǒyǐ…]. Then check your answers with a partner or the class. 1. 上海很美。我很想去上海看看。 因为上海很美，所以我很想去上海看看。 2. 现在已经是六月了。天气不冷。 因为现在已经是六月了，所以天气不冷。 3. 我要上北京的暑期班。我要去北京。 因为我要上北京的暑期班，所以我要去北京。 4. 我今天十一点才起床。我还没有吃早饭。 因为我今天十一点才起床，所以我还没有吃早饭。
22-7
Complete the following sentences with 比如 [bǐrú], 等等，and your own examples. Then share your answers with a partner. Example:
我们参加了很多活动...... Wǒmen cānjiā le hěnduō huódòng… 我们参加了很多活动，比如﹕看京剧，写书法等等。
1. 我喜欢吃中国菜 …… 我喜欢吃中国菜，比如﹕酸辣汤、炒饭，水饺等等。 2. 我很想去中国看看，想去很多地方…… 中国很多城市都很漂亮，比如﹕上海、北京、香港等等。 3. 我朋友会说很多语言…… 他会说很多语言，比如﹕中文、英文、日文等等。
文化点滴
CULTURE NOTES
Do you know … •
what the two types of Peking opera are? They are 文戏 (civil pieces), which contain mostly singing, and 武戏 (martial pieces), which feature acrobatics and stunts.
•
what the personality is of a character with a red-painted face? Red indicates uprightness and loyalty.
•
what the expression “the four treasures of the study room” refers to? It is an expression that refers to paper, writing brush, ink slab, and ink stick.
行动吧！LET’S GO! Answer the following questions with a partner or your group. 1. 书画展在哪儿？展览室在几楼？ 国立故宫博物院，二楼 2. 展览是从几月几日到几月几日？ 六月一日 到 八月 三十一日
139
Maintext Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 22 Arts and Culture
3. 书画展的票多少钱？ 40 元 4. 你觉得秋雨看书画展会不会很开心？为什么？ 会，秋雨很喜欢书画。
140
Review Answer
Lesson 19 to Lesson 22
复习 Review Lesson 19 to Lesson 22
II. Writing and Character Review 1. Radical practice game. Form groups of three or four. Write the following radicals on separate squares of paper. 疒
心 (忄)
人 (亻)
手(扌)
口
火(灬)
Turn all the squares over so that the blank sides face up. As you take turns, flip over one of the paper squares and say a character you have learned that has the same radical in it. Write the character on a piece of paper so the group can keep track of which characters have already been said. (Once a character has been said, it cannot be used again.) Keep playing until you have come up with as many characters as you can think of. Then compare your group’s list with other groups. Did you find all the same characters for the radicals? Key: 疒﹕病 痛 心 (忄)﹕感 息 必 意 思 愉 快 人 (亻)﹕休 备 做 系 手(扌)﹕把 搬 找 打 口﹕咳 嗽 啊 尝 火(灬)﹕烧 热
III. Comprehensive Review 1. Work with a partner or in small groups. Last Saturday, 海华，志信，秋雨，and 欧阳明 were all planning to attend a graduation party and bring a dish. One person couldn’t make it. At the party they all talked about what they will do in the summer. Discuss the following clues and use the chart below to figure out how each person came to the party, what item they brought, and what they will do this summer. Clues: 1. 欧阳明有一点不舒服，他发烧头疼，这几天他都没出去。 2. 志信把他的车借给妹妹了。 3. 在夏天的时候，欧阳明决定要学日文。他应该认真地在学校学习。 4. 海华做饭做得很好吃，比如﹕炒饭，汤，蛋糕。她要在一家蛋糕店实习。 5. 秋雨把昨天买的飞机票带来给大家看。她想一面去法国旅行一面学法文。 6. 因为秋雨的家离晚会很近，所以她会走过来。 7. 志信很爱吃中国菜。他一定会带中国菜去晚会。 8. 秋雨带了三瓶可乐去晚会。
141
Review Answer
Lesson 19 to Lesson 22
开 车
走 路
坐 公 共 汽 车
没 来
可 乐
蛋 糕
小 笼 包
没 带 东 西
实 习
暑 期 班
去 国 外
还 没 决 定
海华
✓
✓
✓
志信
✓
✓
✓
秋雨
✓
✓
✓
欧阳明
✓
✓
✓
142
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 22 Arts and Culture
第二十二课 艺术和文化 Lesson 22 Arts and Culture I. Listening Exercises 22-1
Listen to the passage. Then choose the best answer for each of the following questions. 我到上海已经四个星期了，这四个星期我每天都很忙。早上七点就要起床，八点开始上课。每 天都有很多功课，不过这儿的生活很有意思，我也有了一些新朋友，他们常常帮我学习，还请我 去他们家玩。我的中文老师也很不错, 他很热心，大家都很喜欢他。 每个星期三早上，我们都要参观上海的一些地方。我们一起坐车去，大家都非常开心，路上一 面看风景，一面唱歌。 上海是一个很大的城市，我很喜欢上海的小吃。 下个星期我们还要去一家美国公司实习，我们想多学一些东西。 1. How long has he been in Shanghai? a. A week. b. Four weeks. c. Two months. d. Four months. 2. When does class start every day? a. 7:30 A.M. b. 8:00 A.M. c. 8:30 A.M. d. 9:00 A.M. 3. What does he do every Wednesday morning? a. Takes Chinese class. b. Works in an American company. c. Goes to a friend’s house. d. Visits some places in Shanghai. 4. What will he do next week? a. He will go sightseeing with friends. b. He will go out to eat with friends. c. He will intern at a company. d. He will learn how to drive in Shanghai.
22-2
Listen to the challenge dialogue. Though there may be some words and phrases that are unfamiliar to you, see if you can understand the general meaning by using what you have learned. Then choose whether the following statements are true or false. 晓丽﹕ 喂，你好！ 海华﹕ 是晓丽吗？ 晓丽﹕ 是我，你是海华吗？ 海华﹕ 对。好久没给你打电话了，你最近怎么样？ 晓丽﹕ 忙得很。你呢？
143
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
Lesson 22 Arts and Culture
海华﹕ 我现在在北京。来这儿已经有两个星期了。 晓丽﹕ 北京怎么样？ 海华﹕ 很不错。有很多好吃的东西。我朋友也带我去看了京剧，还去了长城和很多地方。我很喜 欢这儿。 晓丽﹕ 你什么时候回来？ 海华﹕ 下个月。对了，你最近在忙什么？ 晓丽﹕ 我这几个月都在忙着找工作。 海华﹕ 有工作了吗？ 晓丽﹕ 还没有呢。
22-3
1. She has had lots of homework recently.
True
False
2. He tried to find good food, but didn’t have much luck.
True
False
3. She is looking for a new apartment.
True
False
Listen to the challenge dialogue again and choose the best answer for each of the following questions. 1. Where is he now? a. At home. b. In the South. c. In Europe. d. In China. 2. How long has he been there? a. Two days. b. Two weeks. c. A month. d. Two months. 3. When will he come back? a. Next month. b. Next week. c. In three days. d. Next Tuesday.
II. Character Exercises 22-4
Look at this lesson’s Language in Use reading again. Find five words in the reading for each of the following categories and write down the characters next to each category. 1. People or things 城市，大楼，京剧，书法，小笼包，同事，老板，电子邮件，课，功课，老师，中文 2. Action 尝尝，收到，学到，保重，参加，工作，参观，进步，写 3. Time words 今天，星期，六月十五号，每天，现在，有时候，2010 年 4. Descriptive expressions 认真，美丽，高兴，开心，热心，有意思，好吃，好，忙
144
SAM Answer (Simplified Version)
22-5
22-7
Lesson 22 Arts and Culture
Choose the correct traditional form for each of the following characters. a. 讓 b. 廳 c. 麗 1. 丽 2. 剧
a. 劇
b. 時
c. 機
3. 东
a. 個
b. 東
c. 樂
4. 笼
a. 籃
b. 籠
c. 筆
5. 尝
a. 嚐
b. 聽
c. 電
6. 兴
a. 學
b. 興
c. 識
7. 处
a. 極
b. 運
c. 處
Answer the questions below, using 比如 to give examples. 1. Which classes do you like? e.g. 我很喜欢上不同的语言课，比如﹕中文课、法文课，日文课等等。 2. What places would you like to travel to? e.g. 我很想去中国看看，想去很多地方…… 中国很多城市都很漂亮，比如﹕上海、北京、台北，香港等等。 3. What kinds of food do you like to eat? e.g. 我喜欢吃中国菜，比如﹕酸辣汤、炒饭，水饺等等。
145
Vocabulary List (Simplified Version)
Lessons 1-22
生词表 VOCABULARY LIST Lesson 1 你
好
是
学生(学)
吗
也
他
不
老师
她
教授
您
贵
姓
请问(请)(问)
中文
叫
什么
她
吴小美
于英
我
呢
的
英文
名字
谁
同学(同)
补充词 中文
Lesson 2
专名 李文中
Lesson 3 哪
国
人
很
对了
法国
美国
中国
说
会
一点儿(儿)
法文
和
韩国
加拿大
墨西哥
日本
西班牙
语言
那
书
这
本
文学
工程
难
可是
功课
多
我们(们)
少
大学生
系
数学
计算机(电脑)
专业(主修)
辅修
忙
累
作业
考试
有点儿
还好
朋友
来
介绍
一下
个
都
常
跟
丁明
方小文
女朋友
男朋友
英国
补充词 德国
Lesson 4 太
补充词 容易
Lesson 5 室友
专名 王红 补充词 没有
认识
146
有
几
两
Vocabulary List (Simplified Version)
Lessons 1-22
Lesson 6 家
大家
从
在
一
四
爸爸
妈妈
姐姐
工作
工程师
男朋友(男)
没有
辆
车
只
狗
爱
专名 纽约 补充词 兄弟姐妹
哥哥
妹妹
弟弟
女朋友(女)
孩子
宠物
猫
爷爷(外公)
奶奶(外婆)
商人
医生
护士
家庭主妇
律师
厨师
Lesson 7 住
哪儿
宿舍
多少
号
房间
大
电话(电)
小
号码
二
三
五
六
七
八
九
手机(手)(机)
校外(校)(外)
十
零
专名 陈爱文
张友朋
补充词 校内(内)
公寓
房子
Lesson 8 认识
去
上课(课)
下课
以后
事儿
想
回
一起
吃饭(吃)(饭)
菜
今天
下次
怎么样
行
再见(再)(见)
专名 韩国
日本
补充词 名片
休息
早饭
午饭(中饭)
晚饭
宵夜
Lesson 9 正在
打电话(打)
喂
等一下儿(等)
知道了(知道)
谢谢
吧
对
忙
看
电视
做
上网
我就是
位
留言(留话)
对不起
什么时候(时候)
回来
晚上
要
给
补充词 占线
打错了
电影
网络(网路)
通
睡觉
不客气
不谢
网站
147
发短信(送简讯)
Vocabulary List (Simplified Version)
Lessons 1-22
Lesson 10 每天(每)(天)
半
起床
大学
生活
学期
门
点
睡觉
就
才
刻
分
然后
图书馆
下午
喜欢
打球(球)
写
信
电子邮件
地址
祝
年
月
日
差
早上(早)
专名 小明
学文
补充词 点钟
钟头
小时
分钟
秒
过
上午
中午
下午
晚上(晚)
现在
熬夜
红
茶
还是(还)
绿
服务员
坐
小姐
先生
先
喝
杯
冰
水
瓶
可乐
面
饺子
盘
炒
十
点菜(点)
碗
汤
双
孙信美
杨欢
饭馆
餐厅
菜单
小费
买单
饮料
果汁
咖啡
白饭
馄饨
鱼
海鲜
青菜
猪肉(肉)
牛肉
鸡肉
豆腐
沙拉
面包
水果
甜点
饼干
蛋糕
可以
借
明天
用
得
机场
接
妹妹
玩
飞机
到
手排挡(手)
开
应该
问题
白
色
停
停车场
这次
练习
这样
就
能
王本乐
上海
洛杉矶
买
件
衬衫
店员(店)
条
裙子
或者
裤子
黄
不错
比较
穿
黑
试试
帮
好看
让
觉得
钱
块
张
电影
票
Lesson 11
筷子 专名 张正然 补充词
Lesson 12
进步 专名 于影 补充词 自动排挡
Lesson 13
148
Vocabulary List (Simplified Version)
Lessons 1-22
专名 毛爱红
方子英
补充词 贵
便宜
卖
几号(号)
大
中
小
衣服
外套
毛衣
T-恤衫
短裤
牛仔裤
鞋子
袜子
脱
戴
摘
手表
眼镜
耳环
帽子
颜色
橙色(橘色)
蓝色
紫色
棕色(咖啡色)
金黄色
银灰色
人民币
新台币
港币
美金
过
生日
为
舞会(舞)
Lesson 14 岁
有空
星期(星期六)
请
参加
一定
做
蛋糕
送
棒
不客气
多大
地图
吹
蜡烛
晚会
跳舞(跳)
补充词 日历
月历
庆生
礼物
听
音乐
唱歌(歌)
祝你生日快乐
前边
参观
欢迎
里边(里)
厨房
公用
旁边
进
客厅
走
对面
餐厅
洗澡间
卧室
中间
桌子
上边
学习
后边
公园
真
梁园生
包志中
左边
右边
下边
间
门
书桌
窗户
椅子
衣橱
床
厕所
杂志
乱
整齐
干净
脏
篮球
得
俩
教练
教
游泳
非常
快
体育馆
游泳池
健身房
锻炼
现在
昨天
球赛
作业
包
慢
滑雪
爬山
远足
Lesson 15
专名 田进 补充词
Lesson 16
补充词 社团
俱乐部
球季
运动
骑自行车
棒球
橄榄球
足球
网球
跑步(跑)(步)
春天
久
时间
过
放
春假
气候
夏
秋
冬
其中
最
暖和
短
有时候
热
Lesson 17
149
Vocabulary List (Simplified Version) 华氏
Lessons 1-22
百
度
极
刮风(风)
下雨(雨)
冷
下雪(雪)
放假
寒假
暑假
假期
四季
天气
晴
阴
凉
摄氏
长
气温
火车
旅行
离
学校
远
只要
分钟
骑
自行车
公共汽车
走路(路)
近
西部
先
风景
船
南部
听说(听)
海边
景色
一共
租
白秋影
加拿大
东
北
旺季
淡季
单车(脚踏车)
出租汽车(计程车)
火车
公车(巴士)
马路
地下道
隧道
码头
司机
感冒
饿
怎么了
好像
舒服
头疼(头)(疼)
咳嗽
生病(病)
考试
复习
所以
医生
吃药(药)
地
休息
准备
笔记
感谢
送
打针
护士
医院
诊所
严重
厉害
流感(流行性感冒)
预防针
流感疫苗
把
带来
啊
搬
出
出去
过来
做饭
没关系
以前
但是
女朋友
必须
第一天(第)
付
房租
楼上
马上
签约
租屋
楼下
见面(面) 专名 小玲 补充词
Lesson 18
专名 季长风 补充词 海滩 摩托车(机车) 地铁
汽车 车站
捷运
Lesson 19 发烧
专名 欧阳迎
唐志信
补充词 医务室(医护室) 体温
Lesson 20
专名 常天
夏中明
谢进学
房东
房客
补充词 搬家
150
Vocabulary List (Simplified Version)
Lessons 1-22
Lesson 21 暑假
毕业
决定
可能
申请
研究生院(研究)
国外
留学
找
打工
家
公司
实习
暑期
班
一面
有意思
愉快
一路平安(平安)
好运
白秋雨
加州
研究生
博士生
学位
学士
硕士
博士
因为
不过
认真
已经
美丽
城市
到处
新
大楼
一些
地方
活动
比如
京剧
书法
等等
东西
小笼包
机会
尝尝
开始
高兴
收到
看来
开心
同事
热心
老板
学到
来信
保重
健康
顺利
电脑
专名 程海华 补充词 大学生 简历(履历表)
Lesson 22
补充词 心想事成
151
Language in Use (Simplified Version)
Lessons 1-22
课文 (繁体字) LANGUAGE IN USE (TRADITIONAL CHARACTERS)
第一課 你好﹗ Mary: 你好﹗ John: 你好﹗ Mary: 你是學生嗎？ John: 我是學生。你呢？ Mary: 我也是學生。 John: 他呢？他是學生嗎？ Mary: 他不是學生。他是老師。
第二課 您貴姓？ Mary: 你好﹗請問您貴姓？ John: 我姓李，我的英文名字是 John Lee，中文名字是李文中。你呢？請問你叫什麽名字？ Mary: 我叫 Mary。我的英文名字是 Mary Wood，中文名字是吳小美。 John: 她呢？她是誰？ Mary: 她是我的同學于英。
第三課 你是哪國人？ 李文中﹕ 小美，你好嗎？ 吳小美﹕ 我很好。對了，文中，你是哪國人？ 李文中﹕ 我是法國人。你呢？你是美國人嗎？ 吳小美﹕ 不是，我不是美國人，我是英國人。 李文中﹕ 老師呢？ 吳小美﹕ 他是中國人。 他說中文。 李文中﹕ 你會說中文嗎？ 吳小美﹕ 我會說一點兒中文，我也會說法文和英文。
152
Language in Use (Simplified Version)
Lessons 1-22
第四課 你學什麽？ 吳小美﹕ 文中，那是你的書嗎？ 李文中﹕ 那是我的書。 吳小美﹕ 那是一本什麽書？ 李文中﹕ 那是一本英文書。 吳小美﹕ 這本呢？這是一本什麽書？ 李文中﹕ 這是一本中文書。 吳小美﹕ 對了，你學什麽？ 李文中﹕ 我學英國文學，你呢？ 吳小美﹕ 我學工程。 李文中﹕ 工程難嗎？ 吳小美﹕ 不太難。可是功課很多。 李文中﹕ 我們的功課也不少。
第五課 這是我朋友 吳小美﹕ 文中，來﹗我來介紹一下。這是我室友，王紅。這是我朋友，文中。 李文中﹕ 你好﹗ 王紅﹕
你好﹗你有室友嗎？
李文中﹕ 有，我有室友。 王紅﹕
你有幾個室友？
李文中﹕ 我有兩個室友。 王紅﹕
他們都是誰？
李文中﹕ 他們是丁明和方小文。他們都是中國人。我常跟他們說中文。
第六課 我的家 大家好﹗我叫吳小美，我是從紐約來的，我學工程。我來介紹一下我的家。我家在紐約，有四個人﹕ 爸爸﹑媽媽﹑姐姐和我。爸爸是英國人，媽媽是美國人。他們都在紐約工作。爸爸是工程師，媽媽是老師， 我和姐姐都是學生。姐姐有男朋友，我沒有。我們有兩輛車，一隻狗。我的家很好。我很愛我的家。
153
Language in Use (Simplified Version)
Lessons 1-22
第七課 你住哪兒？ 陳愛文﹕ 友朋，你住在哪兒？ 張友朋﹕ 我住宿舍。 陳愛文﹕ 多少號？ 張友朋﹕ 三一四號。 陳愛文﹕ 你的房間大嗎？有沒有電話？ 張友朋﹕ 房間很小。有電話。 陳愛文﹕ 你的電話號碼是多少？ 張友朋﹕ (一四二)二六八九三七五。 陳愛文﹕ 你有手機嗎？ 張友朋﹕ 有。號碼是(一四二)五一二六八三七。你也住宿舍嗎？ 陳愛文﹕ 不，我不住宿舍，我住校外。
第八課 你認識不認識他？ 張友朋﹕ 愛文，你去哪兒？ 陳愛文﹕ 是你，友朋，我去上課。你呢？ 張友朋﹕ 我也去上課。下課以後你有事兒嗎？ 陳愛文﹕ 我沒有事兒。我想回宿舍。有什麽事兒嗎？ 張友朋﹕ 你認識不認識我的朋友小文？ 陳愛文﹕ 我認識他。我們一起上英國文學課。 張友朋﹕ 下課以後我跟他一起去吃飯。你去不去？ 陳愛文﹕ 太好了﹗去哪兒吃飯？ 張友朋﹕ 你想不想吃韓國菜？ 陳愛文﹕ 想。可是我也想吃日本菜。 張友朋﹕ 我們今天吃韓國菜，下次吃日本菜，怎麽樣？ 陳愛文﹕ 行。下課以後再見。 張友朋﹕ 再見。
154
Language in Use (Simplified Version)
Lessons 1-22
第九課 他正在打電話 Telephone Situation 1: 在，請等一下兒 陳愛文﹕ 喂﹗我是愛文。請問友朋在嗎？ 方書程﹕ 在，他在他的房間。請等一下兒。喂﹗友朋﹗你的電話。 張友朋﹕ 知道了﹗謝謝﹗ 張友朋﹕ 喂! 我是友朋，你是愛文吧﹗ 陳愛文﹕ 對，是我。你在忙嗎？ 張友朋﹕ 沒有。我正在看電視呢。你在做什麽？ 陳愛文﹕ 我在上網。 Telephone Situation 2: 我就是 陳愛文﹕ 喂﹗ 張友朋﹕ 喂﹗ 陳愛文﹕ 請問友朋在嗎？ 張友朋﹕ 我就是。請問您是哪位？ 陳愛文﹕ 我是愛文。 Telephone Situation 3: 不在，請留言 陳愛文﹕ 喂﹗請問友朋在嗎？ 丁 明﹕ 對不起，他不在。他在上課。 陳愛文﹕ 請問他什麽時候回來？ 丁 明﹕ 今天晚上。你要不要留言？ 陳愛文﹕ 好的。我是愛文。我的電話是(一四二)二六八九七五三。請他回來以後給我打電話。謝謝﹗ 丁 明﹕ 不謝。再見。
第十課 我每天七點半起床 小明﹕ 你好﹗ 這個學期我很忙，有五門課。你知道我每天幾點起床﹑幾點睡覺嗎？ 我七點半就起床，晚上十二點半 以後才睡覺。每天都很忙。 九點一刻去上課，十點二十分下課。然後，我去圖書館看書。下午下課以後，我喜歡去打球。每天都 有很多功課。 這是我的大學生活，你呢？給我寫信吧。我的電子郵件地址是﹕xuewen376@zhongwen.edu 祝
好 學文 二○○九年十一月二十日
155
Language in Use (Simplified Version)
Lessons 1-22
第十一課 你要紅茶還是綠茶？ 服務員﹕ 請問，幾位？ 張正然﹕ 三位。 服務員﹕ 好，請跟我來。請坐。 張正然﹑ 孫信美﹑楊歡﹕謝謝﹗ 服務員﹕ 小姐，先生，請問，你們想先喝點兒什麽？ 孫信美﹕ 我喜歡喝茶。 服務員﹕ 你要紅茶還是綠茶？ 孫信美﹕ 我要一杯冰紅茶。 楊歡﹕
我要一杯水。
張正然﹕ 我要一瓶可樂。 服務員﹕ 好，一杯冰紅茶﹑一杯水﹑一瓶可樂。請等一下。 張正然﹕ 對了，你們喜歡吃飯還是吃麵？ 孫信美﹕ 我都喜歡。 楊歡﹕
我想吃餃子。
服務員﹕ 這是您的冰紅茶﹑水﹑還有可樂。你們要點菜嗎？ 張正然﹕ 好，我們點一盤炒飯﹑一盤炒麵和二十個餃子吧。 孫信美﹕ 我們還要三碗湯。對了，我們也要三雙筷子，謝謝﹗
第十二課 我可以借你的車嗎？ 于影﹕
本樂，明天下午你用不用車？
王本樂﹕ 我不用。你有什麽事兒嗎？ 于影﹕
我得去機場接人，可以借你的車嗎？
王本樂﹕ 可以。你要去接誰？ 于影﹕
我妹妹和她男朋友。他們從上海坐飛機去洛杉磯玩兒，明天會到我這兒來。
王本樂﹕ 我的車是手排擋的，你會不會開？ 于影﹕
應該沒問題。我爸爸的車也是手排擋的，我常開他的車。
王本樂﹕ 我的車是白色的，車號是 BD5730, 停在五號停車場。 于影﹕
知道了。謝謝﹗
王本樂﹕ 不謝。你妹妹他們會說英文嗎？ 于影﹕
會一點兒，這次他們想多學習一點兒英文。
王本樂﹕ 太好了，我得跟他們多練習一點兒中文。這樣，我的中文就能進步了。
156
Language in Use (Simplified Version)
Lessons 1-22
第十三課 我想買一件襯衫
店員﹕
兩位小姐想買什麽？
毛愛紅﹕ 我想買一件襯衫。 方子英﹕ 我想買一條裙子或者褲子。 店員﹕
這件黃襯衫怎麽樣？
毛愛紅﹕ 還不錯。可是我比較喜歡穿黑色的，有沒有黑色的？ 店員﹕
有，在這兒，你試試﹗
方子英﹕ 愛紅，來，你幫我看看。我穿裙子好看還是穿褲子好看？ 毛愛紅﹕ 你穿穿，讓我看看。我覺得你穿這條裙子好看。 方子英﹕ 請問，這條裙子多少錢？ 店員﹕
十五塊。
方子英﹕ 好，我買了。 毛愛紅﹕ 我要買這件黑襯衫。 店員﹕
對了，小姐，這張電影票是你的嗎？
方子英﹕ 是的，這張電影票是我的。謝謝﹗我們等一下要去看電影。
第十四課 我今年二十歲 方子英﹕ 愛紅，二月十八日你有沒有空？ 毛愛紅﹕ 二月十八日那天是星期幾？ 方子英﹕ 星期六。 毛愛紅﹕ 我有空。有什麽事兒嗎？ 方子英﹕ 那天我過生日，我男朋友要爲我開一個生日舞會，我想請你參加。 毛愛紅﹕ 謝謝你，我一定去。還有誰會去？ 方子英﹕ 我們想請我們的同學和朋友都參加。 毛愛紅﹕ 我會做蛋糕。我送你一個生日蛋糕，怎麽樣？ 方子英﹕ 太棒了﹗謝謝你﹗ 毛愛紅﹕ 不客氣。你今年多大？ 方子英﹕ 我今年二十歲。你呢？你的生日是幾月幾號？ 毛愛紅﹕ 我的生日是十月三號，我今年二十二歲。你的舞會在哪兒開？ 方子英﹕ 在我男朋友的家，這是他的地址。你知道怎麽去嗎？ 毛愛紅﹕ 沒問題﹗我有地圖。星期六下午五點見﹗ 方子英﹕ 再見﹗
157
Language in Use (Simplified Version)
Lessons 1-22
第十五課 圖書館在宿舍前邊 Situation: 今天是宿舍參觀日，在學生宿舍。 田進﹕
你們好﹗歡迎你們來看我的宿舍。請跟我來。
梁園生﹕ 田進，你的宿舍裡邊有沒有厨房？ 田進﹕
有厨房，是公用的。
包志中﹕ 你的房間在哪兒？ 田進﹕
我的房間在旁邊，從這兒走。來，請進。這是客廳，客廳的對面是一個餐廳。
梁園生﹕ 洗澡間呢？ 田進﹕
洗澡間在客廳和臥室的中間。你看，這是我的臥室。
包志中﹕ 桌子上邊的中文書都是你的嗎？ 田進﹕
有的是我的，有的是我朋友的。
包志中﹕ 你常在宿舍學習嗎？ 田進﹕
不，我不常在宿舍學習，我常去圖書館學習。
梁園生﹕ 圖書館在哪兒？ 田進﹕
圖書館在宿舍前邊。圖書館的後邊還有一個公園。我常去那兒打球。
梁園生，包志中﹕你們的宿舍真不錯﹗
第十六課 她打籃球打得很好 張正然﹕ 你們倆要去哪兒？ 孫信美，楊歡﹕我們去打籃球。 張正然﹕ 你們籃球打得怎麽樣？ 孫信美﹕ 楊歡籃球打得很好。我還不太會打籃球，她是我的教練，她教得很好。 楊歡﹕
不行，我還打得不太好。
張正然﹕ 我不常打籃球，我常常和我室友去游泳，他游泳游得非常快。 楊歡﹕
你們常去哪兒游泳？
張正然﹕ 我們常去體育館裡邊的游泳池游泳，我們也常去健身房鍛煉。 孫信美﹕ 你現在要不要跟我們去打籃球？ 張正然﹕ 現在不行。我昨天看球賽看得太晚了，今天起得很晚，現在得去做作業。 楊歡﹕
昨天我們那兒包餃子﹑做中國菜。你晚上到我們那兒吃餃子吧。
張正然﹕ 太好了﹗我很喜歡吃餃子。你們包餃子包得快不快？ 孫信美﹕ 我們包得很慢。 楊歡﹕
信美很會做飯。她做飯做得很好。
158
Language in Use (Simplified Version)
Lessons 1-22
第十七課 春天就要來了 小玲﹕ 好久不見﹗ 你現在怎麽樣？時間過得真快，春天就要來了，我們也快要放春假了。 我們這兒的氣候春夏秋冬都有。其中我最喜歡春天，很暖和，可是很短。夏天有時候很熱，最熱的時 候，會到華氏一百度，熱極了。秋天有時候會颳風﹑下雨。這兒的冬天非常冷，常常下雪。 放春假的時候我想去你那兒玩玩，我們很快就要見面了﹗ 祝 好﹗ 大中 二○一○年三月十日
第十八課 我們要坐火車去旅行 季長風﹕ 秋影，你住在校外嗎？離學校遠不遠？ 白秋影﹕ 不太遠，開車只要五分鐘。 季長風﹕ 你每天怎麽來學校？ 白秋影﹕ 我常騎自行車，下雨下雪的時候就坐公共汽車，有時候我也走路，可以鍛煉鍛煉。你呢？ 季長風﹕ 我住在宿舍，離學校很近，我每天走路來學校。 白秋影﹕ 對了，這個春假你要做什麽？ 季長風﹕ 我要跟我的室友一起去西部旅行。 白秋影﹕ 你們怎麽去？ 季長風﹕ 我們想先坐火車去，路上可以看看風景。然後坐船去加拿大，再從加拿大坐飛機回來。你呢？ 白秋影﹕ 我很想我爸爸﹑媽媽和妹妹，我要先回家。然後再跟朋友開車去玩兒。 季長風﹕ 你們要去哪兒玩兒？ 白秋影﹕ 我們想去南部玩兒。聽說那兒的海邊景色很美。 季長風﹕ 你們有幾個人去？ 白秋影﹕ 我們一共有五個人去，我們想租一輛車。
第十九課 我感冒了 唐志信﹕ 歐陽迎，你吃飯了嗎？ 歐陽迎﹕ 還沒有呢。我不餓。 唐志信﹕ 你怎麽了？好像不舒服。 歐陽迎﹕ 我感冒了。我頭疼發燒，還有一點兒咳嗽。 唐志信﹕ 你怎麽生病了呢？ 歐陽迎﹕ 這幾天我有很多考試，每天都在復習，睡覺睡得太少，所以就病了。 唐志信﹕ 你看醫生了沒有？ 歐陽迎﹕ 看了。我也吃藥了。可是還沒有好呢。 唐志信﹕ 你應該在家好好地休息。不應該來上課。 歐陽迎﹕ 你說得很對。可是我有很多考試。我得好好地準備。 唐志信﹕ 這是我上課的筆記，借給你看看。 歐陽迎﹕ 非常感謝﹗好吧，我現在就回家休息。 唐志信﹕ 好，我開車送你回去。你得好好地睡覺。
159
Language in Use (Simplified Version)
Lessons 1-22
第二十課 我把小謝帶來了...... 常天﹕
中明，我回來了。我把車開回來了，還把小謝也帶來了。
夏中明﹕ 是小謝啊﹗快請他進來。 謝進學﹕ 我聽說你們這兒有一個人搬出去了，我想搬進來，所以過來看看。 常天﹕
你不想住宿舍了，是不是？
謝進學﹕ 是的。宿舍太小了，我想搬出來住。這兒可以不可以做飯？ 夏中明﹕ 可以，我們有厨房。 謝進學﹕ 太好了﹗我很喜歡做飯。搬出來以後就可以常常做飯了。 常天﹕
你有狗嗎？我們這兒不能有狗。
謝進學﹕ 沒關係。以前我有一隻狗，但是宿舍不可以有狗，所以我把我的狗給我女朋友了。現在沒有狗了。 夏中明﹕ 還有，我們必須在每個月的第一天付房租。 謝進學﹕ 沒問題﹗ 常天﹕
喂，小謝，我在樓上，你要不要上來看看？中明，你把小謝帶上來看看吧。
夏中明﹕ 常天，我們現在還不能上去。你得先下來幫我把這張桌子搬上去。 常天﹕
好的，我馬上下去。
第二十一課 暑假你要做什麽？ 程海華﹕ 秋雨，我問你，你明年就要畢業了，畢業以後你想做什麽？ 白秋雨﹕ 我還沒有决定呢。可是我很喜歡學習，我可能會申請研究生院，或者去國外留學。你呢？你什麽 時候畢業？ 程海華﹕ 我還有兩年才畢業呢。畢業以後我想去找工作。 白秋雨﹕ 我們就要放暑假了，今年暑假你要做什麽？ 程海華﹕ 我要去打工。我要去一家公司實習。 白秋雨﹕ 在哪兒？是什麽工作？ 程海華﹕ 在加州，是一家電腦公司。你呢？暑假你要做什麽？ 白秋雨﹕ 我要去中國，我申請了去上海的暑期班學習，我想一面學中文，一面在中國旅行。 程海華﹕ 那一定很有意思﹗你什麽時候去？ 白秋雨﹕ 下個星期。 程海華﹕ 這麽快﹗你到中國以後要常常給我寫電子郵件。 白秋雨﹕ 沒問題。我祝你工作愉快﹗ 程海華﹕ 我也祝你一路平安﹗祝你好運﹗
160
Language in Use (Simplified Version)
Lessons 1-22
第二十二課 我到上海了 海華﹕ 你好﹗今天是六月十五號，我一個星期以前就到上海了。對不起，因爲太忙了，所以今天才給你寫電 子郵件。 我們每天都有很多課，功課也不少。不過老師教得很好，也很認真。我們每天都說中文，我的中文進 步得很快，現在我已經能說很多中文了。 上海是一個非常美麗的城市，到處都是新的大樓。我們參觀了一些地方，也參加了一些活動，比如﹕看京 劇﹑寫書法等等，都很有意思。還有，上海有很多好吃的東西，其中我最喜歡吃的是小籠包。你有機會應 該嘗嘗。 你開始實習了嗎？忙不忙？有空請給我寫電子郵件。 祝 好﹗ 秋雨 二○一○年六月十五日 秋雨﹕ 你好﹗很高興收到你的電子郵件。看來你在上海過得很開心。 我現在在洛杉磯，已經開始實習了。這兒的同事都很好，也很熱心，常常教我很多東西，老闆也不錯。 我的工作有時候忙，有時候不太忙，我想我得認真地工作，才能學到一些東西。 好了，不多寫了。有空請多來信。 多保重。 祝 好﹗ 海華 二○一○年六月十七日
161